Worked Examples for Eurocode 2

Draft Version

All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate
the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and
application.

No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or
information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or
advisors.

Readers should note that this is a draft version of a document and will be subject to
revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the
latest version.
1 Introduction
1.1 Aim
The aim of this publication is to illustrate through worked examples how Eurocode 2[1–4] may
be used in practice to design in-situ building structures. It is intended that these worked
examples will explain how calculations to BS EN 1992–1–1[1] may be performed. This will be
carried out within the environment of other relevant publications:
ƒ Eurocode 2.
ƒ Other Eurocodes.
ƒ Material and execution standards.
ƒ Publications by The Concrete Centre and others.
There are, therefore, many references to other documents and while it is intended that this
publication, referred to as Worked examples, can stand alone it is anticipated that users
may require several of the other references to hand, in particular, Concise Eurocode 2 [5],
which summarises the rules and principles that will be commonly used it the design of
reinforced concrete framed buildings to Eurocode 2.

Figure 1.1
Worked examples in context
The worked examples relate to in-situ concrete building structures. The designs are in
accordance with Eurocode 2 Part 1–1[1], as modified by the UK National Annex[1a] and explained
in PD 6687[5]. The design of other forms of concrete are covered in other publications[6–9].
Generally, the calculations are cross-referenced to the relevant clauses in Eurocode 2[1–4]
and, where appropriate, to other documents. See Table 1.1 for a guide to presentation and
Section 11 for references. All references in the margins are to Eurocode 2 Part 1–1[1] unless
indicated otherwise. References to BS 8110[10]refer to Part 1 unless otherwise stated.

WE 1 Intro v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17/09/2007 Page 1 of 6

Generally, the ‘simple’ examples depend on equations and design aids derived from
Eurocode 2. The derived equations are given in Appendix A and the design aids from Concise
Eurocode 2[11] are repeated in Appendix B.
The examples are intended to be appropriate for their purpose, which is to illustrate the
use of Eurocode 2 for in-situ building structures. There are simple examples to illustrate
how typical hand calculations might be done using available charts and tables derived from
the Code. These are followed by more detailed examples illustrating the detailed workings
of the codes. In order to explain the use of Eurocode 2, several of the calculations are
presented in detail far in excess of that necessary in design calculations once users are
familiar with the code. To an extent, the designs are contrived to show valid methods of
designing elements, to give insight and to help in validating computer methods. They are
not necessarily the most appropriate, the most economic or only method of designing the
members illustrated.

Table 1.1
Guide to presentation
<6.4.4> Relevant clauses or figure numbers from Eurocode 2 Part
1–1 (if the reference is to other parts, other Eurocodes or
6.4.4 other documents this will be indicated)

<NA>
From the relevant UK National Annex (generally to
NA Eurocode 2 Part 1–1)

<6.4.4 &NA>
From both Eurocode 2 Part 1–1 and UK National Annex
6.4.4 & NA

<Fig. 2.1>
Relevant parts of this publication
Section 5.2

<SMDSC[22] >
Relevant parts of Standard method of detailing structural
SMDSC[22] concrete – a manual for best practice.

<Concise EC2>
Concise Eurocode 2
Concise EC2

<How to, Floors>

How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2:
How to, Floors Floors

As some of the detailing rules in Eurocode 2 are generally more involved than those to BS
8110, some of the designs presented in this publication have been extended into areas that
have traditionally been the responsibility of detailers. These extended calculations are not
necessarily part of ‘normal’ design but are included at the end of some calculations. It is
assumed that the designer will discuss and agree with the detailer areas of responsibility and
the degree of rationalisation, the extent of designing details, assessment of curtailment and
other aspects, that the detailer should undertake. It is recognised that in the vast majority of
cases, the rules given in detailing manuals[12,13] will be used. However, the examples are
intended to help when curtailment, anchorage and lap lengths need to be determined.

WE 1 Intro v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17/09/2007 Page 2 of 6

1.2 BS EN 1990 Eurocode: Basis of structural design
In the Eurocode system BS EN 1990, Eurocode: Basis of structural design[14] overarches all
the other Eurocodes, BS EN 1991 to BS EN 1999. BS EN 1990 defines the effects of actions,
including geotechnical and seismic actions, and applies to all structures irrespective of the
material of construction. The material Eurocodes define how the effects of actions are
resisted by giving rules for design and detailing. See Figure 1.2.

Figure 1.2
The Eurocode hierachy

BS EN 1990 provides the necessary information for the analysis of structures including
partial and other factors to be applied to the actions from BS EN 1991. It establishes the
principles and requirements for the safety, serviceability and durability of structures. It <BS EN 1990:
describes the basis for design as follows: 2.1>
A structure shall be designed and executed (constructed) in such a way that it will, during its
intended life, with appropriate degrees of reliability and in an economical way:
■ Sustain all actions and influences likely to occur during execution and use.
■ Remain fit for the use for which it is required.
In other words, it shall be designed using limit states principles to have adequate stability,
structural resistance (including structural resistance in fire), serviceability and durability.
For building structures, a design working life of 50 years is implied.

BS EN 1990 states that limit states should be verified in all relevant design situations,
persistent, transient or accidental. No relevant limit state shall be exceeded when design
values for actions and resistances are used in design. The limit states are:
■ Ultimate limit states (ULS), which are associated with collapse or other forms of
structural failure.
■ Serviceability limit states (SLS), which correspond to conditions beyond which specified
service requirements are no longer met.

All actions are assumed to vary in time and space. Statistical principles are applied to arrive
at the magnitude of the partial load factors to be used in design to achieve the required
reliability index (level of safety). There is an underlying assumption that the actions
themselves are described in statistical terms.

WE 1 Intro v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17/09/2007 Page 3 of 6

 1.3 BS EN 1991 Eurocode 1: Actions on structures
Actions are defined in the 10 parts of BS EN 1991 Eurocode 1: Actions on structures[15]
BS EN 1991–1–1: 2002: Densities, self-weight, imposed loads for buildings
BS EN 1991–1–2: 2002: Actions on structures exposed to fire
BS EN 1991–1–3: 2003: Snow loads
BS EN 1991–1–4: 2005: Wind actions
BS EN 1991–1–5: 2003: Thermal actions
BS EN 1991–1–6: 2005: Actions during execution
BS EN 1991–1–7: 2006: Accidental actions
BS EN 1991–2: 2003: Actions on structures. Traffic loads on bridges
BS EN 1991–3: 2006: Cranes and machinery
BS EN 1991–4: 2006: Silos and tanks

This publication is mainly concerned with designing for the actions defined by Part––1
Densities, self-weight, imposed loads for buildings.

Design values of actions and load arrangements are covered in Section 2.

1.4 BS EN 1992 Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures

Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures[1–4] operates within an environment of other
European and British standards – see Figure 1.3. It is governed by Eurocode and subject to
the actions defined in Eurocodes 1, 7 and 8. It depends on various materials and execution
standards and is used as the basis of other standards. Part 2, Bridges, and Part 3, Liquid
retaining structures, work by exception to Part 1–1 and 1–2, that is, clauses in Parts 2 and 3
confirm, moderate or replace clauses in Part 1–1.

Note
National Annexes and
explanatory documents
(e.g. PD 6687, and Non-
Contradictory
Complementary
Information – NCCI) are
not shown.

Figure 1.3
Eurocode 2 in context

WE 1 Intro v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17/09/2007 Page 4 of 6

1.5 National Annexes
It is the prerogative of each member state to control levels of safety in that country. As
a result, some safety factors and other parameters in the Eurocodes, such as climatic
conditions, durability classes and design methods, are subject to confirmation or
selection at a national level. The decisions made by the national bodies become
Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs) which are published in a National Annex (NA)
for each part of each Eurocode. The National Annex may also include reference to non-
contradictory complementary information (NCCI), such as national standards or guidance
documents.

This publication includes references to the relevant National Annexes as appropriate.

1.6 Basis of the worked examples in this publication

The design calculations in this publication are in accordance with:

ƒ BS EN 1990, Eurocode: Basis of structural design[14] and its UK National Annex[14a].

ƒ BS EN 1991, Eurocode 1: Actions on structures in 10 parts[15] and their UK National
Annexes[15a].
ƒ BS EN 1992–1–1, Eurocode 2 – Part 1–1: Design of concrete structures – General rules and
rules for buildings.[1] and its UK National Annex[1a].
ƒ BS EN 1992–1–2, Eurocode 2 – Part 1–2: Design of concrete structures – Part 1–2.
Structural fire design.[2] and its UK National Annex[2a].
ƒ PD 6687 Background paper to the UK National Annexes[5].
ƒ BS EN 1997, Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design – Part 1. General rules.[16] and its UK
National Annex[16a].
ƒ (TBC) BS EN 1992–3, Design of concrete structures – Liquid-retaining and containment
structures[4].

They use materials conforming to:

ƒ BS 8500–1: Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–1: Method of
specifying and guidance to the specifier[17].
ƒ BS 4449: Steel for the reinforcement of concrete – Weldable reinforcing steel – Bar, coil
and decoiled product – Specification[18].

The execution is assumed to conform to:

ƒ PD 6687 Background paper to the UK National Annexes BS EN 1992–1.[5]
ƒ NSCS, National structural concrete specification for building construction, 3rd edition[19].
Or, when available
ƒ BS ENV 13670: Execution of concrete structures. Due 2008[20].
They refer to several publications, notably:

ƒ Concise Eurocode 2 for the design of in-situ concrete framed buildings to BS EN 1992–1–
1: 2004 and its UK National Annex: 2005[11].

ƒ How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2[21].

ƒ Standard method of detailing structural concrete, a manual for best practice
(SMDSC)[22].

WE 1 Intro v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17/09/2007 Page 5 of 6

1.7 Assumptions
1.7.1 Eurocode 2
Eurocode 2 assumes that: <1.3 >

ƒ Design and construction will be undertaken by appropriately qualified and experienced

personnel.
ƒ Adequate supervision and quality control will be provided.
ƒ Materials and products will be used as specified.
ƒ The structure will be adequately maintained and will be used in accordance with the
design brief.
ƒ The requirements for execution and workmanship given in ENV 13670 are complied
with. ENV 13670[20] is currently available but without its National Application <PD 6687[5]>
Document. For building structures in the UK, the background document PD 6687[5]
considers the provisions of the National Structural Concrete Specification (NSCS)[19]
to be equivalent to those in ENV 13670 for tolerance class 1. When published, BS EN
13670[20] and the corresponding National Annex will take precedence.

1.7.2 The worked examples

Unless noted otherwise, the calculations in this publication assume:

ƒ A design life of 50 years. <BS EN 1990 Table 2.1>

ƒ C30/37 concrete. <Table 3.1>
ƒ Grade A, B or C reinforcement. <BS 4449>
ƒ Exposure class XC1. <Table 4.1, BS 8500 Table??>
ƒ 1 hour fire resistance. <The Building Regulations>

Generally each calculation is rounded and it is the rounded value that is used in any further
calculation.

1.8 Material properties

Material properties are specified in terms of their characteristic values. This usually
corresponds to the lower 5% fractile of an assumed statistical distribution of the property
considered.

The values of γc and γs, partial factors for materials, are indicated in Table 1.2.

Table 1.2
Partial factors for materials <Table 2.1 & NA>
Design situation γc – concrete γs – reinforcing steel
ULS – persistent and transient 1.50 1.15
Accidental – non-fire 1.20 1.00
Accidental – fire 1.00 1.00
SLS 1.00 1.00

WE 1 Intro v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17/09/2007 Page 6 of 6

 Worked Examples for Eurocode 2

Draft Version

All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate
the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and
application.

No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or
information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or
advisors.

Readers should note that this is a draft version of a document and will be subject to
revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the
latest version.
2 Analysis, actions and load arrangements
2.1 Methods of analysis
At the ultimate limit state (ULS) the type of analysis should be appropriate to <5.1.1(7)>
the problem being considered. The following are commonly used:
ƒ Linear elastic analysis.
ƒ Linear elastic analysis with limited redistribution.
ƒ Plastic analysis.
At the serviceability limit state (SLS) linear elastic analysis may be used.

Linear elastic analysis may be carried out assuming:

ƒ Cross-sections are uncracked and remain plane (i.e. may be based on concrete
gross sections).
ƒ Linear stress–strain relationships.
ƒ The use of mean values of elastic modulus.
For ULS, the moments derived from elastic analysis may be redistributed provided
that the resulting distribution of moments remains in equilibrium with the applied
actions. In continuous beams or slabs with fck ≤ 50 MPa the minimum ratio of the
redistributed moment to the moment in the linear analysis, δ, is 0.70 where Class
B or Class C reinforcement is used or 0.80 where Class A reinforcement is used.

Within the limits set, coefficients for moment and shear derived from elastic
analysis may be used to determine forces in regular structures (see Appendix B).
The design of columns should be based on elastic moments without redistribution. <5.2.7>

Plastic analysis may be used for design at ULS provided that the required ductility <5.6.2>
can be assured, for example, by:
ƒ Limiting xu / d (to ≤ 0.25 for concrete strength classes ≤ C50/60).
ƒ Using Class B or C reinforcement.
ƒ Ensuring the ratio of moments at intermediate supports to moments in spans is
between 0.5 and 2.0.

2.2 Actions
Actions refer to loads applied to the structure as defined below:
ƒ Permanent actions refer to actions for which the variation in magnitude with
time is negligible.
ƒ Variable actions are actions for which the variation in magnitude with time is
not negligible.
ƒ Accidental actions are actions of short duration but of significant magnitude
that are unlikely to occur on a given structure during the design working life.
Imposed deformations are not considered in this publication.

2.3 Characteristic values of actions

The characteristic value of an action is defined by one of the following three alternatives:
ƒ Its mean value – generally used for permanent actions.
ƒ An upper value with an intended probability of not being exceeded or lower
value with an intended probability of being achieved – normally used for
variable actions with known statistical distributions, such as wind or snow.

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 2 of 26

 ƒ A nominal value – used for some variable and accidental actions.
The values of actions given in the various parts of BS EN 1991: Actions on
structures[14] are taken as characteristic values.

2.4 Variable actions: imposed loads

2.4.1 General
Imposed loads are divided into categories. Those most used in concrete design are
shown in Table 2.1.

Table 2.1 <BS 1991-1-1 Tables 6.1,

Variable actions: categories 6.7, 6.9 & NA>
Category Description
A Areas for domestic and residential activities
B Office areas
C Areas of congregation
D Shopping areas
E Storage areas and industrial use (including access areas)
F Traffic and parking areas (vehicles < 30 kN)
G Traffic and parking areas (vehicles > 30 kN)
H Roofs (inaccessible except for maintenance and repair)
I Roofs (accessible with occupancy categories A – D)
K Roofs (accessible for special services, e.g. for helicopter landing areas)
Notes
1 Category J is not used.
2 For forklift loading refer to BS EN 1991–1–1 Cl. 6.2.3.

2.4.2 Characteristic values

Characteristic values for commonly used imposed loads are given in Tables 2.2a to 2.2g

Table 2.2a <BS 1991-1-1 Tables 6.1,

Variable actions, category A: domestic and residential 6.2 & NA.3>

Sub- Example Imposed loads

category qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)

A Areas for domestic and residential activities

A1 All usages within self-contained dwelling units 1.5 2.0
Communal areas (including kitchens) in smalla blocks of flats
A2 Bedrooms and dormitories, except those in self-contained single family 1.5 2.0
dwelling units and in hotels and motels
A3 Bedrooms in hotels and motels; hospital wards; toilet areas 2.0 2.0
A4 Billiard/snooker rooms 2.0 2.7
A5 Balconies in single-family dwelling units and communal areas in smalla 2.5 2.0
blocks of flats
A6 Balconies in hostels, guest houses, residential clubs. Communal areas in Min.b 3.0 2.0c
largera blocks of flats
A7 Balconies in hotels and motels Min.b 4.0 2.0c
Key
a Small blocks of flats are those with ≤ 3 storeys and ≤ 4 flats per floor/staircase. Otherwise they are considered to
be ‘larger’ blocks of flats
b Same as the rooms to which they give access, but with a minimum of 3.0 kN/m2 or 4.0 kN/m2
c Concentrated at the outer edge

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 3 of 26

Table 2.2b <BS 1991-1-1 Tables
Variable actions, category B: offices 6.1, 6.2 & NA.3>
Sub- Example Imposed loads
category
qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)
B Office areas
B1 General use other than in B2 2.5 2.7
B2 At or below ground floor level 3.0 2.7

Table 2.2c <BS 1991-1-1 Tables

Variable actions, category C: areas of congregation 6.1, 6.2 & NA.3>
Sub- Example Imposed loads
category
qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)
C Areas of congregation
C1 Areas with tables
C11 Public, institutional and communal dining rooms and lounges, cafes 2.0 3.0
and restaurants (Note: use C4 or C5 if appropriate)
C12 Reading rooms with no book storage 2.5 4.0
C13 Classrooms 3.0 3.0
C2 Areas with fixed seats
a
C21 Assembly areas with fixed seating 4.0 3.6
C22 Places of worship 3.0 2.7
C3 Areas without obstacles for moving people
C31 Corridors, hallways, aisles in institutional type buildings, hostels, 3.0 4.5
guest houses, residential clubs and communal areas in largerb
blocks of flats
C32 Stairs, landings in institutional type buildings, hostels, guest houses, 3.0 4.0
residential clubs and communal areas in largerb blocks of flats
C33 Corridors, hallways, aisles in otherc buildings 4.0 4.5
C34 Corridors, hallways, aisles in otherc buildings subjected to wheeled 5.0 4.5
vehicles, including trolleys.
C35 Stairs, landings in otherc buildings subjected to crowds 4.0 4.0
C36 Walkways – Light duty (access suitable for one person, walkway 3.0 2.0
width approx 600 mm)
C37 Walkways – General duty (regular two-way pedestrian traffic) 5.0 3.6
C38 Walkways – Heavy duty (high-density pedestrian traffic including 7.5 4.5
escape routes)
C39 Museum floors and art galleries for exhibition purposes 4.0 4.5
C4 Areas with possible physical activities
C41 Dance halls and studios, gymnasia, stagesd 5.0 3.6
C42 Drill halls and drill roomsd 5.0 7.0
C5 Areas subjected to large crowds
C51 Assembly areas without fixed seating, concert halls, bars and places 5.0 3.6
of worshipd,e.
C52 Stages in public assembly areasd 7.5 4.5
Key
a Fixed seating is seating where its removal and the use of the space for other purposes is improbable
b Small blocks of flats are those with ≤ 3 storeys and ≤ 4 flats per floor/staircase. Otherwise they are considered to
be ‘larger’ blocks of flats
c Other buildings include those not covered by C31 and C32, and include hotels and motels and institutional
buildings subjected to crowds
d For structures that might be susceptible to resonance effects, reference should be made to NA.2.1
e For grandstands and stadia, reference should be made to the requirements of the appropriate certifying
authority.

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 4 of 26

Table 2.2d <BS 1991-1-1 Tables
Variable actions, category D: shopping areas 6.1, 6.2 & NA.3>

Sub- Example Imposed loads

category
qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)
D Shopping areas
D1 Areas in general retail shops 4.0 3.6
D2 Areas in department stores 4.0 3.6

Table 2.2e <BS 1991-1-1

Variable actions, category E: storage areas and industrial use (including access areas) Tables 6.3, 6.4,
NA.4 & NA.5>

Sub- Example Imposed loads

category
qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)

E Storage areas (including access areas)

E1 Areas susceptible to accumulation of goods including access areas
E11 General areas for static equipment not specified elsewhere 2.0 1.8
(institutional and public buildings)
E12 Reading rooms with book storage, e.g. libraries 4.0 4.5
E13 General storage other than those specifieda 2.4/m 7.0
E14 File rooms, filing and storage space (offices) 5.0 4.5
E15 Stack rooms (books) 2.4/m 7.0
(min. 6.5)
E16 Paper storage and stationery stores 4.0/m 9.0
E17 Dense mobile stacking (books) on mobile trolleys in public and 4.8/m 7.0
institutional buildings
(min. 9.6)
E18 Dense mobile stacking (books) on mobile trucks in warehouses 4.8/m 7.0
(min. 15.0)
E19 Cold storage 5.0/m 9.0
(min. 15.0)
E2 Industrial use See PD 6688[22]
Forklifts Classes FL1 to FL6 See BS 1991–1–1
Tables 6.5 and 6.6
Key
a Lower bound value given. More specific load values should be agreed with client

Table 2.2f <BS 1991-1-1 Tables

Variable actions, categories F and G: traffic and parking areas 6.7, 6.8 & NA.6>

Sub- Example Imposed loads

category
qk (kN/m2) Qk (kN)

F Traffic and parking areas (vehicles < 30 kN)

Traffic and parking areas (vehicles < 30 kN) 2.5 5.0
G Traffic and parking areas (vehicles > 30 kN)
Traffic and parking areas (vehicles > 30 kN) 5.0 To be determined
for specific use

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 5 of 26

2.4.2.1 Roofs
Roofs are categorized according to their accessibility.. Imposed loads for roofs <BS EN 1991-1-1
that are normally accessible are generally the same as for the specific use and 6.3.4 & NA>
category of the adjacent area. Imposed loads for roofs without access are given
in Table 2.2g.

Table 2.2g <BS 1991-1-1 6.3.4.1(2)

Variable actions, category H, I and J: roofs Tables 6.9, 6.10, 6.11 & NA.7>

Sub- Example Imposed loads

category
qk Qk
(kN/m2) (kN)
H Roofs (inaccessible except for maintenance and repair)
Roof slope, α° < 30° 0.6
30° < α < 60° 0.6(60 – α) / 30 0.9
< 60° 0
I Roofs (accessible with occupancy categories A – D)
Categories A – As Tables 2.2a to 2.2d
according to specific use
K Roofs (accessible for special services, e.g. for helicopter
landing areas)
Helicopter class HC1 (< 20 kN) (subject to dynamic factor Φ = 1.4) 20
Helicopter class HC2 (< 60 kN) 60

2.4.2.2 Movable partitions

The self-weight of movable partitions may be taken into account by a uniformly <BS 1991-1-1
distributed load qk which should be added to the imposed loads of floors as follows: 6.3.1.2(8)>
ƒ For movable partitions with a self-weight of 1.0 kN/m wall length: qk = 0.5
kN/m2.
ƒ For movable partitions with a self-weight of 2.0 kN/m wall length: qk = 0.8
kN/m2.
ƒ For movable partitions with a self-weight of 3.0 kN/m wall length: qk = 1.2
kN/m2.

Heavier partitions should be considered separately.

2.4.3 Reduction factors

2.4.3.1 General
Roofs do not qualify for load reductions. The method given below complies with the < BS EN 1991-1-1,
UK National Annex but differs from that given the Eurocode. 6.3.1.2 (10),
6.3.1.2 (10) & NA>

2.4.3.2 Area
A reduction factor for imposed loads for area αA may be used and should be
determined using

αA = 1.0 – A / 1000 ≥ 0.75 (NA.1) < BS EN 1991-1-1

where 6.3.1.2 (10) &
A is the area (m2) supported with loads qualifying for reduction (i.e. categories NA>
A to E as listed in Table 2.1).

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 6 of 26

2.4.3.3 Number of storeys
A reduction factor for number of storeys αn, may be used and should be
determined using
αn = 1.1 – n / 10 for 1 ≤ n ≤ 5 < BS EN 1991-
αn = 0.6 for 5 < n ≤ 10 1-1 6.3.1.2
αn = 0.5 for n > 10 (11) & NA>
where
n = number of storeys with loads qualifying for reduction (i.e. categories A to D as
listed in Table 2.1).

2.4.3.4 Use
According to the UK NA, αA and αn may not be used together. < BS EN 1991-1-1
6.3.1.2 (11) & NA>

2.5 Variable actions: snow loads

In persistent or transient situations, snow load on a roof, s, is defined as being: <BS EN 1991-1-3 5.2(3)>

s = μi Ce Cts k
where
μi = snow load shape factor
μ1 = undrifted snow shape factor
μ2 = drifted snow shape factor
For flat roofs, 0° = α (with no higher structures close or abutting),
μ1 = μ2 = 0.8
For shallow monopitch roofs, 0°< α < 30° (with no higher <BS EN 1991-1-3 5.3.1 ,
structures close or abutting), μ1 = 0.8, μ2 = 0.8 (1 + α/ 30) 5.3.2 & NA>
For other forms of roof and local effects refer to BS EN 1991–1–3
Sections 5.3 and 6
Ce = exposure coefficient <BS EN 1991-1-3 5.2(7),
For windswept topography Ce = 0.8 Table 5.1>
For normal topography Ce = 1.0
For sheltered topography Ce = 1.2

Ct = thermal coefficient, Ct = 1.0 other than for some glass-covered <BS EN 1991-1-3 5.2(8)>
roofs, or similar
sk = characteristic ground snow load kN/m2
= 0.15(0.1Z + 0.05) + (A+100) / 525 <BS EN 1991-1-3 NA 2.8>
where
Z = zone number obtained from the map in BS EN 1991–1–3 NA
Figure NA.1
A = site altitude, m
Figure NA.1 of the NA to BS EN 1991–1–3 also gives figures for sk at
100 m a.m.s.l. associated with the zones. For the majority of the
South East, the Midlands, Northern Ireland and the north of England
apart from high ground, sk = 0.50 kN/m2. For the West Country, West
Wales and Ireland the figure is less. For most of Scotland and parts of
the east coast of England, the figure is more. See Figure 2.1
Snow load is classified as a variable fixed action. Exceptional circumstances <BS EN 1991-1-3 2(1)
may be treated as accidental actions in which case reference should be made 5.2(3)>
to BS EN 1991–1–3

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 7 of 26

 <Figure NA.1 NA to BS EN 1991–1–3>

Figure 2.1
Characteristic ground snow load map
(Ground snow load at 100 m a.m.s.l. (kN/m2)

2.6 Variable actions: wind loads

The procedure for determining wind load to BS EN 1991–1–4 is presented below.

This presentation is a very simple interpretation of the Code intended to provide a

basic understanding of the Code with respect to rectangular-plan buildings with flat
roofs. In general maximum values are given: with more information a lower value might
be used. The user should be careful to ensure that any information used is within the
scope of the application envisaged. The user is referred to more specialist guidance [22]
or the Code[23] and UK National Annex[23a]. Note that at the time of writing the UK
National Annex had not been published: the information is taken from the DCLG
document and a 2006 draft of the Annex.
Determine the fundamental value of the basic wind velocity, vb,0, from Expression NA.1.

vb,0 = vb,mapcalt <BS EN 1991-1-4 4.2(1) Note 2

where NA 2.4 Exp. (NA.1)>
vb,map = fundamental basic wind velocity from Figure 2.2 <BS EN 1991-1-4 4.2(1) Note 2
NA 2.4 (Fig. NA.1)>
calt = altitude factor
= conservatively 1 + 0.001A <BS EN 1991-1-4 4.2(1) Note 2,
where NA 2.4, NA 2.5>
A = altitude of the site in metres above mean sea level a.m.s.l.

Calculate basic wind velocity, vb

vb = cdircseasoncprobvb,0
where
cdir = directional factor. Conservatively, cdir = 1.0 (cdir is a minimum
of 0.73 or 0.74 for wind in an easterly direction 30° to 120°)
cseason = season factor
For a 6 month return period, including winter, or greater,
cseason = 1.00
cprob = probability factor <BS EN 1991-1-4 4.2(1) Note 4,
= 1.00 for return period of 50 years Note 5 NA 2.8>

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 8 of 26

 Calculate basic wind pressure, qb
qb = 0.5 ρ vb2
where
ρ = density of air <BS EN 1991-1-4 4.5(1) Note 2,
=1.226 kg/m3 (= 12.0 N/m3) for UK NA 2.18>

Calculate peak wind pressure, qp

qp = ce,flat(z) qb for z ≤ 50 m <BS EN 1991-1-4 4.5(1) Note 1,
where NA 2.17>
ce,flat = exposure factor
ce,flat is obtained directly from Figure NA.7 then <BS EN 1991-1-4 4.5(1) Note 1,
modified by applying a factor from Figure NA.8 for sites NA 2.17, Figs NA.7 & NA.8>
in town terrain. Dependent on distance from shoreline
and town perimeter, respectively, and on z – hdis
where z and hdis are explained below
When orography or dynamic effects are significant (i.e. <BS EN 1991-1-4 4.5(1) Note 1,
the structure is on a hill or at the top of an escarpment) NA 2.17>
refer to BS EN 1991–1–4
<BS EN 1991-1-4 7.2.2(1), Note,
z = reference height
NA 2.26>
For windward wall,
z = ze
when h ≤ b, ze = h <BS EN 1991-1-4 7.2.2(1)( Fig.
7.4), NA.2.26>

Figure 2.2 Map of fundamental Figure 2.3 Exposure factor Figure 2.4 Multiplier for
basic wind velocity, vb,map, (m/s) ce,flat(z) for sites in country or exposure correction for sites in
town terrain town terrain
Note
Subject to altitude correction.
<BS EN 1991-1-4 4.2(1) Note 2, <BS EN 1991-1-4 4.5(1) Note 1, NA <BS EN 1991-1-4 4.5(1) Note 1,
NA 2.4 (Fig. NA.1)> 2.17 (Fig. NA.7)> NA 2.17 (Fig. NA.8)>

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 9 of 26

 when b < h ≤ 2b, ≤ b high ze = b
> b high ze = h
when h > 2b, ≤ b high ze = b
> 2b high ze = h
> b high < 2b high, the area may
be divided into horizontal strips
with ze = height above ground
where
h = height of building
b = breadth of building
For leeward and side walls,
z = height of building
hdis = displacement height
For country sites hdis = 0 <BS EN 1991-1-4 4.3.2 (1) Note,
NA 2.11 (Fig. NA.3)>
For town sites:
If x ≤ 2have hdis = min[0.8 have; 0.6 h] <BS EN 1991-1-4 A.5>
If 2have< x ≤ hdis = min[1.2 have – 0.2 x; 0.6h]
6have
If x >6have hdis = 0
where
x = distance between buildings
have = obstruction height. <BS EN 1991-1-4 (Fig. A.5)>
In the absence of more accurate information the
obstruction height may be taken as have = 15 m for
terrain category IV (town centres)
Calculate peak external wind load, We
We = q p(z) c pe
where
cpe = (external) pressure coefficient dependent on size of area <BS EN 1991-1-4 7.2.1(1) Note 2,
considered and zone. For 1 m2 and above cpe,10 should be used NA. 2.25>
For the walls of rectangular-plan buildings, cpe,10 is <BS EN 1991-1-4 7.2.2(1) Note 1,
determined from Table NA.4a and Table NA.4b. NA.2.27 (Tables NA.4a & NA.4b) >
See Table 2.3.
For flat roofs, cpe,10 is determined from BS EN 1991–1–4
Table 7.2. See Table 2.4.
For other forms of roof refer to BS EN 1991–1–1 and the UK NA.

Table 2.3 <BS EN 1991-1-4 7.2.2(2) Note 1,

External pressure coefficient, cpe,10 ,for walls of rectangular-plan NA 2.27, Tables NA.4a & NA.4b >
buildings

Zone Description cpe,10

max. min.
Zone A For walls parallel to the wind direction, areas –1.6
within 0.2min[b; 2h] of windward edge
Zone B For walls parallel to the wind direction, areas –0.9
within 0.2min[b; 2h] of windward edge
Zone C For walls parallel to the wind direction, areas –0.9
from 0.2min[b; 2h] to min[b; 2h] of windward
edge
Zone D Windward wall + 0.8
Zone E Leeward wall –0.5
Zones D and E Net + 1.3
Notes
h = height of building
b = breadth of building

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 10 of 26

 Table 2.4
External pressure coefficient, cpe,10 min, for flat roofs <BS EN 1991-1-4 7.2 (Table 7.2) & NA >

Zone Description cpe,10 min

Sharp edge With
at eaves parapet
Zone F Within 0.1min[b; 2h] of windward edge and within –1.8 –1.6
0.2min[b; 2h] of return edge (parallel to wind
direction)
Zone G Within 0.1min[b; 2h] of windward edge and –1.2 –1.1
outwith 0.2min[b; 2h] of return edge (parallel to
wind direction)
Zone H Roof between 0.1min[b; 2h] and 0.5min[b; 2h] –0.7 –0.7
from windward edge
Zone I Remainder between 0.5min[b; 2h] and leeward ± 0.2 ± 0.2
edge
Notes
h = height of building
b = breadth of building

Where necessary, calculate pressure coefficient, cpi

cpi = internal pressure coefficient dependent on size of <BS EN 1991-1-4 7.2.9(6) Note 2
openings. & NA>
For no dominant openings cpi may be taken as the
more onerous of +0.2 and –0.3

Calculate resultant wind force, Fw

Fw = cscdΣWAref <BS EN 1991-1-4 5.3.2, Exp. (5.4) & NA >
where
cscd= structural factor, conservatively <BS EN 1991-1-4 6.1(1) Note & NA.2.20 >
= 1.0 <BS EN 1991-1-4 6.2(1) a), 6.2(1) c) & NA>
or may be derived <BS EN 1991-1-4 6.2(1) e) & NA.2.20 >
where
cs = size factor
cs may be derived from Exp. (6.2) or Table NA.3. <BS EN 1991-1-4 6.3(1),
Depending on values of (b + h) and (z – hdis) and Exp. (6.2), NA.2.20
dividing into Zone A, B or C, a value of cs (a factor (Table NA3) >
< 1.00) may be found
cd = dynamic factor
cd may be derived from Exp. (6.3) or Figure NA.9.
Dependent on values of δs (logarithmic decrement of <BS EN 1991-1-4 6.3(1),
structural damping) and h / b, a value of cd (a factor > Exp. (6.3), NA.2.20(Fig.
1.00) may be found. NA9) >
cd may be taken as 1.0 for framed buildings with
structural walls and masonry internal walls and for
cladding panels and elements
ΣW = c f q p ( z e )
where
cf = force coefficient for the structure or structural <BS EN 1991-1-4 7, 8 & NA >
element (as described above)
qp(ze) = peak velocity pressure at reference height ze <BS EN 1991-1-4 7, 8 & NA >
(as described above)
Aref = reference area of the structure or structural element <BS EN 1991-1-4 5.3.2, Exp.
(5.4) & NA >

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 11 of 26

2.7 Permanent actions
The densities and weights of commonly used materials, sheet materials and forms of construction are
given in Table 2.5.

Table 2.5 Typical permanent actions [24]

Table 2.5 a) Bulk densities for soils and materials

Bulk densities kN/m3 Bulk densities kN/m
Soils Concrete – plain 24.0
Clay – stiff 19 ––22 Concrete – reinforced 25.0
Clay – soft 16 – 19 Concrete – wet reinforced 26.0
Granular – loose 16 – 18 Glass 25.6
Granular – dense 19 – 21 Granite 27.3
Silty clay, sandy clay 16 – 20 Hardcore 19.0
Materials Limestone (Portland stone – med. weight) 22.0
Asphalt 22.5 Limestone (Marble – heavyweight) 26.7
Blocks – aerated concrete (min.) 5.0 Macadam paving 21.0
Blocks – aerated concrete (max.) 9.0 MDF 8.0
Blocks – dense aggregate 20.0 Plaster 14.1
Blocks – lightweight 14.0 Plywood 6.3
Books – bulk storage 8 – 11 Sandstone 23.5
Brickwork – blue 24.0 Screed – sand/cement 22.0
Brickwork – engineering 22.0 Steel/iron 77.0
Brickwork – fletton 18.0 Terracotta 20.7
Brickwork – London stock 19.0 Timber – Douglas fir 5.2
Brickwork – sand lime 21.0 Timber – European beech/oak 7.1
Chipboard 6.9 Timber – Grade C16 3.6
Concrete – aerated 10.0 Timber – Grade C24 4.1
Concrete – lightweight 18.0 Timber – Iroko teak 6.4

Table 2.5 b) Typical area loads for concrete slabs and sheet materials
Typical area loads kN/m3 Typical area loads kN/m
Concrete slabs Plasterboard (12.5 mm) 0.09
P. C. solid units (100 mm) 2.50 Plasterboard (19 mm) 0.15
P. C. hollowcore unitsa (150 mm) 2.40 Plywood (12.5 mm) 0.08
P. C. hollowcore unitsa (200 mm) 2.87 Plywood (19 mm) 0.12
P. C. hollowcore unitsa (300 mm) 4.07 Quarry tiles including mortar bedding 0.32
P. C. hollowcore unitsa (400 mm) 4.84 Raised floor – heavy duty 0.50
Ribbed slabb (250 mm) 4.00 Raised floor – medium weight 0.40
Ribbed slabb (300 mm) 4.30 Raised floor – lightweight 0.30
Ribbed slabb (350 mm) 4.70 Render (13 mm) 0.30
Waffle slabc – standard moulds (325 mm) 6.00 Screed – 50 mm 1.15
Waffle slabc – standard moulds (425 mm) 7.30 Screed – lightweight (25 mm) 0.45
Waffle slabc – standard moulds (525 mm) 8.60 Stainless steel roofing (0.4 mm) 0.05
Sheet materials Suspended ceiling – steel 0.10
Asphalt (20 mm) 0.46 Suspended fibreboard tiles 0.05
Carpet and underlay 0.05 T&G boards (15.5 mm) 0.09
Chipboard (18 mm) 0.12 T&G boards (22 mm) 0.12
Dry lining on stud (20 mm) 0.15 Tiles – ceramic floor on bed 1.00
False ceiling – steel framing 0.10 Battens for slating and tiling 0.03
Felt (3 layer) and chippings 0.35 Tiles – clay roof (max) 0.67
Glass – double glazing 0.52 Tiles – natural slate (thick) 0.65
Glass – single glazing 0.30 Tiles – interlocking concrete 0.55
Insulation – glass fibre (150 mm) 0.03 Tiles – plain concrete 0.75
Linoleum (3.2 mm) 0.05 Key
Paving stones (50 mm) 1.20 a Hollowcore figures assume no topping
b Ribbed slabs: 150 web @ 750 centres with 100 mm thick
Plaster – two coat gypsum (12 mm) 0.21 flange/slab. Web slope 1:10
Plaster skim coat 0.05 c Waffle slabs: 150 ribs @ 900 centres with 100 mm thick
flange/slab. Web slope 1:10

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 12 of 26

Table 2.5 c) Loads for typical forms of construction
Loads for typical forms of kN/m2 x Loads for typical forms of kN/m2
construction construction
Cavity wall Residential floor
102.5 mm brickwork 2.40 Carpet 0.05
50 mm insulation 0.02 Floating floor 0.15
100 mm blockwork 1.40 Self-weight of 250 mm solid slab 6.25
Plaster 0.21 Suspended ceiling 0.20
Total 4.0 Services 0.10
Lightweight cladding Total 6.75
Insulated panel 0.20 School floor
Purlins 0.05 Carpet/flooring 0.05
Dry lining on stud 0.15 Self-weight of 250 mm solid slab 6.25
Total 0.40 Suspended ceiling 0.15
Curtain walling Services 0.20
Allow 1.00 Total 6.60
Precast concrete cladding Hospital floor
Facing 1.00 Flooring 0.05
Precast panel (100 mm) 2.40 Self-weight of 250 mm solid slab 6.25
Insulation 0.05 Screed 2.20
Dry lining on stud 0.15 Suspended ceiling 0.15
Total 3.60 Services (but can be greater) 0.05
Dry lining Total 9.15
Metal studs 0.05
Plasterboard and skim × 2 0.40 Flat roof/ external terrace
Total 0.45 Paving or gravel (allow) 2.20
Timber stud wall Waterproofing 0.50
Timber studs 0.10 Insulation 0.10
Plasterboard and skim × 2 0.40 Self-weight of 250 mm solid slab 6.25
ceiling
Total 0.50 Suspended ceiling 0.15
Office floor Services 0.30
Carpet 0.03 Total 9.50
Raised floor 0.30
Self weight of 250 mm solid slab 6.25 Timber pitched roof
Suspended ceiling 0.15 Tiles (range 0.50–0.75) 0.75
Services 0.30 Battens 0.05
Total 7.03 Felt 0.05
Office core area Rafters 0.15
Tiles and bedding (allow) 1.00 Insulation 0.05
Screed 2.20 Plasterboard & skim 0.15
Self-weight of 250 mm solid slab 6.25 Services 0.10
Suspended ceiling 0.15 Ceiling joists 0.15
Services 0.30 Total perpendicular to roof 1.45
Total 9.90 Total on plan assuming 30° pitch 1.60
Stairs
150 mm waist (≡ 175 @ 25 kN/m3) 4.40 Metal decking roof
Treads 0.15 × 0.25 × 4/2 @ 25 kN/m3 1.88 Insulated panel 0.20
Screed 0.05 @ 22 kN/m3 1.10 Purlins 0.10
Plaster 0.21 Steelwork 0.30
Finish: tiles & bedding 1.00 Services 0.10
Total 8.60 Total 0.70

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 13 of 26

2.8 Design values of actions
2.8.1 General case
The design value of an action Fd that occurs in a load case is
Fd = γFψFk <BS EN 1990 6.3.1 >

where
γF = partial factor for the action according to the limit state under
consideration. Table 2.6 indicates the partial factors to be used in the
UK for the combinations of representative actions in building structures.
ψFk may be considered as the representative action, Frep, appropriate to the
limit state being considered
where
ψ = a factor that converts the characteristic value of an action into a
representative value. It adjusts the value of the action to account
for the nature of the limit state under consideration and the joint
probability of the actions occurring simultaneously. It can assume
the value of 1.0 for a permanent action or ψ0 or ψ1 or ψ2 for a
variable action. Table 2.7 shows how characteristic values of
variable actions are converted into representative values. This
table is derived from BS EN 1990[13] and its National Annex[13a].
Fk = characteristic value of an action as defined in Sections 2.2 and 2.3.

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 14 of 26

 Table 2.6 <BS EN 1990
Partial factors (γF) for use in verification of limit states in persistent and transient Table A1.4 & NA
design situations >

Limit state Permanent actions Leading variable Accompanying variable

(Gk) action (Qk,1) actions (Qk,i)d
a) Equilibrium (EQU)
1.10 (0.9)a 1.50 (0.0)a ψ0,i 1.50 (0.0)a
b) Strength at ULS (STR/GEO) not involving geotechnical actions
Either
Exp. (6.10) 1.35 (1.0)a 1.5 ψ01.5
or worst case of
Exp. (6.10a) 1.35 (1.0)a ψ0 1.5 ψ01.5
and
Exp. (6.10b) 1.25 (1.0)a 1.5 ψ01.5
c) Strength at ULS with geotechnical actions (STR/GEO)
Worst case of
Set B 1.35 (1.0)a 1.5 (0.0)a
and
Set C 1.0 1.3
d) Serviceability
Characteristic 1.00 1.00 ψ0,i 1.00
Frequent 1.00 ψ1,1 1.00 ψ2,i 1.00
Quasi-permanent 1.00 ψ2,1 1.00 ψ2,i 1.00
e) Accidental design situations
Exp. (6.11a) 1.0 Ad b ψ1.1 (main) ψ2,1 (others)
f) Seismic
Exp. (6.12a/b) 1.0 AEdc ψ2,i
Key
a Value if favourable (shown in brackets)
b Leading accidental action, Ad, is unfactored
c Seismic action, AEd
d Refer to BS EN 1990 A1.2.2 & NA
Notes
1 The values of ψ are given in Table 2.7.
2 Geotechnical actions given in the table are based on Design Approach 1 in Clause A1.3.1(5) of BS EN 1990, which
is recommended in its National Annex.

2.8.2 Design values at ULS

For the ULS of strength (STR), the designer may choose between using Exp. (6.10) or the < BS EN 1990
less favourable of Exp. (6.10a) or Exp. (6.10b). 6.4.3.2(3) >

2.8.2.1 Single variable action

At ULS, the design value of actions is

Either
Exp. 6.10 1.35 Gk + 1.5 Qk,1

or the worst case of:

Exp. 6.10a 1.35 Gk + ψ0,I 1.5 Qk,1
and
Exp. 6.10b 1.25 Gk + 1.5 Qk,1

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 15 of 26

Table 2.7
Values of ψ factors < BS EN 1990 A1.2.2 & NA>

Action ψ0 ψ1 ψ2
Imposed loads in buildings
Category A: domestic, 0.7 0.5 0.3
residential areas
Category B: office areas 0.7 0.5 0.3
Category C: congregation areas 0.7 0.7 0.6
Category D: shopping areas 0.7 0.7 0.6
Category E: storage areas 1.0 0.9 0.8
Category F: traffic (area vehicle 0.7 0.7 0.6
weight ≤ 30 kN)
Category G: traffic area (30 kN < 0.7 0.5 0.3
vehicle weight ≤ 160 kN)
Category H: roofsa 0.7 0.0 0.0
Snow loads where altitude ≤ 0.5 0.2 0.0
1000 m a.m.s.l.a
Wind loadsa 0.5 0.2 0.0
Temperature effects (non-fire)a 0.6 0.5 0.0
Notes
1 The numerical values given above are in accordance with BS EN 1990 and its UK National
Annex.
2 Categories K and L are assumed to be as for Category H
Key
a On roofs, imposed loads, snow loads and wind loads should not be applied together. < BS
EN 1991–1–1–1 3.3.2>

Expression (6.10) leads to the use of γF = γG = 1.35 for permanent actions and γF =
γQ = 1.50 for variable actions (γG for permanent actions is intended to be constant
across all spans).

Expression (6.10) is always equal to or more conservative than the less favourable
of Expressions (6.10a) and (6.10b). Expression (6.10b) will normally apply when
the permanent actions are not greater than 4.5 times the variable actions (except
for storage loads, category E in Table 2.7, where Exp. (6.10a) always applies).

Note
Assuming ψ 0 = 0.7 i.e. applicable to all areas except storage.
Figure 2.5
When to use Exp. (6.10a) or Exp. (6.10b)

Therefore, except in the case of concrete structures supporting storage loads

where ψ0 = 1.0, or for mixed use, Exp. (6.10b) will usually apply. Thus, for

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 16 of 26

 members supporting vertical actions at ULS, 1.25Gk + 1.5Qk will be appropriate
for most situations and applicable to most concrete structures. See Figure 2.5

Compared with the use of Exp. (6.10), the use of either Exp. (6.10a) or (6.10b)
leads to a more consistent reliability index across lightweight and heavyweight
materials.

2.8.2.2 Accompanying variable actions

Again the designer may choose between using Exp. (6.10) or the less favourable of Exp. < BS EN 1990
(6.10a) or (6.10b). 6.4.3.2(3) >

Either:
Exp. (6.10) 1.35 Gk + 1.5 Qk,1 + Σψ0,i 1.5 Qk,i
or the worst case of:
Exp. (6.10a) 1.35 Gk + ψ0,I 1.5 Qk,1 + ψ0,i 1.5 Qk,i
and
Exp. (6.10b) 1.25 Gk – 1.5 Qk,1 + Σψ0,I 1.5 Qk,i

In the above, Qk,1 refers to the leading variable action and Qk,i refers to accompanying
independent variable actions. In general the distinction between the two types of
actions will be obvious (see Figure 2.6); where it is not, each load should in turn be
treated as the leading action. Also the numerical values for partial factors given in the
UK National Annex[13a] are used in the equations above. The value of ψ0 depends on the <BS EN 1990
use of the building and should be obtained from the UK National Annex for BS EN 1990 A1.2.2, A1.3.1
(see Table 2.7). & NA>

Generally the variable actions on a

typical office block would be
considered as being three sets of
independent variable actions:
1. Imposed office loads on the
office floors
2. Roof imposed load
3. Wind load

Figure 2.6 Independent variable actions

The expressions take into account the probability of joint occurrence of loads by
applying the ψ0,i factor to the accompanying variable action. The probability that
these combined actions will be exceeded is deemed to be similar to the
probability of a single action being exceeded.

If the two independent variable actions Qk,1 and Qk,2 are associated with different
spans and the use of Exp. (6.10b) is appropriate, then in one set of analyses
1.25Gk + 1.5Qk,1 should be applied to the ‘Qk,1’ spans with 1.25Gk + ψ0,i 1.5Qk,2
applied to the ‘Qk,2’ spans. In associated analyses, 1.25Gk + ψ0,i 1.5Qk,1 should be
applied to the ‘Qk,1’ spans and 1.25Gk + 1.5Qk,2 to the ‘Qk,2’ spans. See Example
2.11.2 (2 variable actions).

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 17 of 26

2.8.3 Design values at SLS

There are three combinations of actions at SLS (or Load combination at SLS).
These are given in Table 2.8. The combination and value to be used depends on
the nature of the limit state being checked. Quasi-permanent combinations are <BS EN 1990 6.5, Table
associated with deformation, crack widths and crack control. Frequent A1.4>
combinations may be used to determine whether a section is cracked or not.
The numeric values of ψ 0, ψ 1 and ψ 2 are given in Table 2.7.

Table 2.8
Partial factors to be applied in the verification of the SLS
Combination Permanent actions Gk Variable actions Qk
Unfavourablea Favourablea Leadingb Othersb
Characteristic Gk,sup Gk,inf Qk,1 ψ0,iQk,i
Frequent Gk,sup Gk,inf ψ1,1Qk,1 ψ2,iQk,i
Quasi-permanent Gk,sup Gk,inf ψ2,1Qk,1 ψ2,iQk,i
Key
a Generally Gk,sup and Gk,inf may be taken as Gk. See Section 2.4
b ψ factors are given in Table 2.7

2.8.4 Design values for other limit states

Load combinations are given in Table 2.6 for a) Equilibrium (EQU), b) Strength at
ULS with geotechnical actions (GEO), e) Accidental and f) Seismic design
situations.

2.8.5 Variations in permanent actions

When the variation of a permanent action is not small then the upper (Gkj,sup)
and the (Gkj,inf) characteristic values (the 95 and 5 percentile values <BS EN 1990 4.1.2>
respectively) should be established. This procedure is only necessary when the <BS EN 1990 4.1.2 (3)>
coefficient of variation (= 100 × standard deviation/mean) is greater than 10. In
terms of permanent actions, variations in the self-weight of concrete in
concrete frames are considered small.

At ULS where the variation is not small, γGk,sup should be used with Gkj,sup and
γGk,inf with Gkj,inf. Similarly, where the variation is not small, at SLS Gkj,sup should
be used where actions are unfavourable and Gkj,inf used where favourable.

Where checks, notably checks on static equilibrium (EQU), are very sensitive to <BS EN 1990 6.4.3 (4)>
variation of the magnitude of a permanent action from one place to another the
favourable and unfavourable parts of this action should be considered as
individual actions. γG,sup and γG,inf should be used in such ‘very sensitive’
verifications.

2.9 Load arrangements of actions: introduction

The process of designing concrete structures involves identifying relevant design

situations and limit states. These include persistent, transient or accidental < BS EN 1990 3.2 >
situations. In each design situation the structure should be verified at the
relevant limit states.

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 18 of 26

 In the analysis of the structure at the limit state being considered, the maximum
effect of actions should be obtained using a realistic arrangement of loads.
Generally variable actions should be arranged to produce the most unfavourable
effect, for example to produce maximum overturning moments or maximum
bending moments in spans and supports respectively.

For building structures, design concentrates mainly on the ULS, the ultimate
limit state of strength (STR), and SLS, the serviceability limit state. However, it <BS EN 1990 3.3, 3.4,
is essential that all limit states are considered. The limit states of equilibrium 6.5>.
(EQU), strength at ULS with geotechnical actions (STR/GEO) and accidental <BS EN 1990 6.4>.
situations must be taken into account as appropriate.

2.10 Load arrangements according to the UK National Annex

In building structures, any of the following sets of simplified load arrangements

may be used at ULS and SLS (See Figure 2.7). < 5.1.3 & NA>

ƒ The more critical of:

a) alternate spans carrying γGGk + γQQk with other spans loaded with γGGk; and
b) any two adjacent spans carrying γGGk + γQQk with other spans loaded with γGGk.
ƒ Or the more critical of:
a) alternate spans carrying γGGk + γQQk; with other spans loaded with γGGk; and
b) all spans carrying γGGk + γQQk.
ƒ Or, for slabs only, all spans carrying γGGk + γGGk, provided the following
conditions are met:
• In a one-way spanning slab the area of each bay exceeds 30 m2 (a bay is
defined as a strip across the full width of a structure bonded on the other
sides by lines of support).
• Ratio of the variable action, Qk, to the permanent action, Gk, does not
exceed 1.25.
• Magnitude of the variable action excluding partitions does not exceed 5 kN/m2.
Where analysis is carried out for the single load case of all spans loaded, the
resulting moments, except those at cantilevers, should be reduced by 20%,
with a consequential increase in the span moments.

Note
Whilst the use of Exp. (6.10) is indicated, these arrangements may equally be used with Exp. (6.10a) or
(6.10b).
Figure 2.7
Load arrangements for beams and slabs according to UK NA

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 19 of 26

2.11 Examples
Example 2.11.1 Continuous beam in a domestic structure
Determine the appropriate load combination for a continuous beam in a domestic
structure supporting a 175 mm slab at 6 m centres. gk = 51 kN/m and gk = 9.0
kN/m.

Figure 2.8
Continuous beam in a domestic structure

Actions: kN/m
Permanent action, gk
Self weight, 175 mm thick slabs = 26.3
E/o self weight downstand 800 × 225 = 4.5
50 mm screed @ 22 kN/m3 = 6.6
Finishes and services = 3.0
Dividing wall 2.40 × 4.42 (200 mm dense blockwork with plaster = 10.6
both sides) = 51.0
Total

Variable action, qk
Imposed, dwelling @ 1.5 kN/m2 = 9.0
Ultimate load, n
Assuming use of Exp. 6.10, n = 1.35 × 51 + 1.5 × 9.0 = = 82.4
Assuming use of worst case of Exp. (6.10a) or Exp. (6.10b)
Exp. (6.10a): n = 1.35 × 51 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 9.0 = = 78.3
Exp. (6.10b): n = 1.25 × 51 + 1.5 × 9.0 = = 77.3
In this case Exp. (6.10a) would be critical1 and ∴n = 78.3

Example 2.11.2 Continuous beam in mixed use structure

Determine the various arrangements of actions and magnitude of actions for ULS
verification of a continuous beam supporting a 175 mm slab @ 6 m centres. Note <BS EN 1991-1-1
that the variable actions are from two sources: 6.3.1.1 & NA>
Office use: 2.5 kN/m2, ψ0 = 0.7;shopping use: 4.0 kN/m2, ψ0 = 0.7 < BS EN 1990
A.1.2.2. & NA>

1
This could also be determined from Figure 2.1 or by determining that gk > 4.5qk

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 20 of 26

Figure 2.9
Continuous beam in mixed use structure

a) Load combination
Load combination Exp. (6.10a) or Exp. (6.10b) will be used, as either will produce a smaller
total load than Exp. (6.10). It is necessary to decide which expression governs.

Actions: kN/m

Permanent action
As before, Example 2.8.1 = 51.0
Variable action
Office @ 2.5 kN/m2 = 15.0
Shopping @ 4.0 kN/m2 = 24.0
Ultimate load, n
For office use:
Exp. (6.10a): n = 1.35 × 51 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 15.0 = 84.6
Exp. (6.10b): n = 1.25 × 51 + 1.5 × 15.0 = 86.3
For shopping use:
Exp. (6.10a): n = 1.35 × 51 + 1.5 × 0.7 × 24.0 = 94.1
Exp. (6.10b): n = 1.25 × 51 + 1.5 × 24.0 = 99.8

By inspection Exp. (6.10b) governs in both cases♣

b) Arrangement of actions

i) Actions
As the variable actions arise from different sources, one is a leading variable action and
the other is an accompanying variable action. The unit loads to be used in the various
arrangements are:

Actions: kN/m
Permanent
1.25 × 51.0 = 63.8
Variable
Office use
as leading action, γQQk = 1.5 × 15 = = 22.5
as accompanying action, ψ0γQQk = 0.7 × 1.5 × 15 = = 15.75

♣
This could also be determined from Figure 2.1 or by determining that gk < 4.5qk

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 21 of 26

 Shopping use
as leading action, γQQk = 1.5 × 24 = = 36.0
as accompanying action, ψ0γQQk = 0.7 × 1.5 × 24 = = 25.2
Total variable actions =163.25

ii) For maximum bending moment in span AB

The arrangement and magnitude of actions of loads are shown in Figure 2.10. The variable
load in span AB assumes the value as leading action and that in span CD takes the value
as an accompanying action.

Figure 2.10
For maximum bending moment in span AB

iii) For maximum bending moment in span CD

The load arrangement is similar to that in Figure 2.10, but now the variable load in span AB
takes its value as an accompanying action (i.e. 15.75 kN/m) and that in span CD assumes
the value as leading action (36 kN/m).

Figure 2.11
For maximum bending moment in span CD

iv) For maximum bending moment at support B

The arrangement of loads is shown in Figure 2.12. As both spans AB and BC receive load < BS EN 1991 6.3.1.1 (10)
from the same source, no reduction is possible (other than that for large area2). & NA>

Figure 2.12
For maximum bending moment at support B

2
Variable actions may be subjected to reduction factors: αA, according to A area
supported (m2), αA = 1.0 – A / 1000 ≥ 0.75. < BS EN 1991-1-1 6.3.1.2 (10) & NA>

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 22 of 26

v) For maximum bending moment at support D
The relevant arrangement of loads is shown in Figure 2.13. Comments made in iv) also apply
here.

Figure 2.13
For maximum bending moment at support D

vi) For critical curtailment and hogging in span CD

The relevant arrangement of loads is shown in Figure 2.14.

Figure 2.14
For curtailment and hogging in span CD

Eurocode 2 requires that all spans should be loaded with either γG,supp or γG,inf (as per Table <2.4.3(2)>
2.6). As illustrated in Figure 2.14, using γG,inf, = 1.0 might be critical for curtailment and
hogging in spans.

Example 2.11.3 Propped cantilever

Determine the Equilibrium, ULS and SLS (deformation) load combinations for the
propped cantilever shown in Figure 2.15. The action P at the end of the
cantilever arises from the permanent action of a wall.

Figure 2.15
Propped cantilever beam and loading

For the purposes of this example, the permanent action P is considered to be

from a separate source than the self-weight of the structure so both γG,sup and <BS EN 1990 Table
γG,inf need to be considered. 1.2(B), Note 3>

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 23 of 26

a) Equilibrium limit state (EQU)
For maximum uplift at A

Figure 2.16
EQU: maximum uplift at A

b) Ultimate limit state (ULS)

i) For maximum moment at B and anchorage of top reinforcement BA.

Note
γGk,inf gk = 1.0 gk may be critical in terms of curtailment of top bars BA.
Figure 2.17
ULS: maximum moment at B

ii) For maximum sagging moment AB

Notes
1 Depending on the magnitude of gk, qk length AB and BC, γGkinf gk (= 1.0 gk) may be more critical
for span moment.
2 The magnitude of the load combination indicated are those for Exp. (6.10) of BS EN 1990. The
worse case of Exp (6.10a) and Exp (6.10b) may also have been used.
3: Presuming supports A and B were columns then the critical load combination for Column A
would be as Figure 2.18. For column B the critical load combination might be either as
Figure 2.17 or 2.18.
Figure 2.18
ULS: maximum span moment AB

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 24 of 26

c) Serviceability limit state (SLS) of deformation: (quasi-permanent Loads)
i) For maximum deformation at C

Figure 2.19
SLS: maximum deformation at C

ii) For maximum deformation AB

Note
Quasi-permanent load combinations may also be used for calculations of crack widths
or controlling cracking, i.e. the same load combinations as shown in Figures 2.19 and
2.20 may be used to determine SLS moment to determine stress in reinforcement. The
characteristic and/or frequent combinations may be appropriate for other SLS limit
states: for example, it is recommended that the frequent combination is used to
determine whether a member has cracked or not.
Figure 2.20
SLS maximum deformation AB

Example 2.11.4 Overall stability (EQU)

For the frame shown in Figure 2.21 identify the various load arrangements to
check overall stability (EQU) against overturning. Assume that the structure is an
office block and that the loads qk2 and qk3 may be treated as arising from one
source.

Figure 2.21
Frame configuration

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 25 of 26

Figure 2.22
Frame with floor variable action as leading variable action

b) Treating the roof load as the leading variable action (EQU)

Figure 2.23
Frame with roof variable action as leading variable action

c) Treating wind as the leading variable action (EQU)

Figure 2.24
Frame with wind as lead variable action

WE 2 Basis v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 26 of 26

 Worked Examples for Eurocode 2

Draft Version

All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate
the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and
application.

No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or
information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or
advisors.

Readers should note that this is a draft version of a document and will be subject to
revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the
latest version.
3.5 Flat slabs
This example is for the design of a reinforced concrete flat slab without column heads. The slab is part of
a larger floor plate and is taken from Guide to the design and construction of reinforced concrete flat
slabs[29], where finite element analysis and design to Eurocode 2 is illustrated. As with the Guide, grid line
C will be designed but, for the sake of illustration, coefficients will be used to establish design moments
and shears in this critical area of the slab.

The slab is for an office where the specified load is 1.0 kN / m2 for finishes and 4.0 kN / m2 imposed (no
partitions). Perimeter load is assumed to be 10 kN / m. Concrete is C30 / 37. The slab is 300 mm thick
and columns are 400 mm square and extend 4.5 m above and below. A 2 hour fire rating is required.

Figure 3.18
Part plan of flat slab

3.5.1 Actions
kN / m2
Permanent
Self-weight 0.30 × 25 7.5 <BS EN 1991-1-1 Table A1>
Finishes 1.0 <specified>
gk = 8.5
Variable
Offices
qk = 4.0 <specified & BS EN 1991-1-1 6.3.1.2(8)>

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 1 of 20

3.5.2 Cover
cnom
cnom = cmin + Δcdev <Exp. (4.1)>
where
cmin = max[cmin,b; cmin,dur; 10 mm] <4.4.1.2(3)>
where
cmin,b = 20 mm, assuming 20 mm diam. reinf.
cmin,dur = 15 mm for XC1 and using C30/37 <Table 4.1 BS 8500-1
Δcdev = 10 mm Table A4>
Fire For 2 hours resistance, amin = 35 mm – not critical <BS EN 1992-1-2, Table 5.9>
∴ cnom = 20 + 10 = 30 mm

3.5.3 Load combination and arrangement

Figure 3.19
Panel centred on grid C

Ultimate load, n
By inspection, Exp. (6.10b) is critical. <Fig. 2.5>
n = 1.25 × 8.50 + 1.5 × 4.0 = 16.6 kN / m2 <BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b)>
Arrangement
Choose to use all-and-alternate-spans-loaded load cases and coefficients ‡‡. <5.1.3(1) & NA option b>

3.5.4 Analysis grid line C

Consider grid line C as a bay 6.0 m wide. (This may be
conservative for grid line C but is correct for grid line D etc.)
MEd
Effective spans:
9600 – 2 × 400 / 2 + 2 × 300 / 2 = 9500 mm <5.3.2.2(1)>
8600 – 2 × 400 / 2 + 2 × 300 / 2 = 8500 mm
Check applicability of moment coefficients:
8500 / 9500 = 0.89 ∴ as spans differ by less than 15% of <Concise EC2 Tables 15.2, 15.3>
larger span, coefficients are applicable.
As two span, use table applicable to beams and slabs noting <Concise EC2 Table 15.3>
increased coefficients for central support moment and shear.

‡‡
The all-spans-loaded case with 20% redistribution of support moments would also have <5.3.1 & NA> been
acceptable but would have involved some analysis. The use of Table 5.9 in BS EN 1992–1–2 (Fire resistance of solid
flat slabs) is restricted to where redistribution does not exceed 15%: The coefficients presume 15% redistribution at
supports. <Concise Table 15.3>

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 2 of 20

Design moments in bay
Spans
MEd = (1.25 × 8.5 × 0.090 + 1.5 × 4.0 × 0.100)× 6.0 × 9.52 = 842.7 kNm <Concise EC2Table 15.3>
Support
MEd = 16.6 × 0.106 × 6.0 × 9.52 = 952.8 kNm <Concise EC2 Table 15.3>

Figure 3.20
Column and middle strips

Apportionment of moments between column strips and middle strips:

Percentages
Column strip Middle strip
-ve (hogging) Long span = 70%§§ Long span = 30% <Table I.1, CS Flat slab
Short span = 75% Short span = 25% guide[29]>
+ve (sagging) 50% 50% <Table I.1>
Parallel to grid C, column strip is ly / 2 = 3 m wide. The middle strip is also 3 m wide. <NA.3[1a], Fig. I.1>

Long span moments:

MEd
Column strip, 3 m wide Middle strip, 3 m wide
-ve (hogging) 0.70 × 952.8 / 3.0 = 222.3 kNm / m 0.30 × 952.8 / 3.0 = 95.3 kNm / m
+ve (sagging) 0.50 × 842.7 / 3.0 = 140.5 kNm / m 0. 50 × 842.7 / 3.0 = 140.5 kNm / m

§§
The Concrete Society Guide[29] recommends a percentage, k1, based on Lx / Ly Assuming Lx / Ly = 1.5 the distribution
of moments in the long span between column strips and middle strips is given as 70% and 30%.

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 3 of 20

 Punching shear force, VEd
At C2,
VEd = 16.6 × 6.0 × 9.6♣ × 0.63 × 2 = 1204.8 kN <Concise EC2 Table 15.3>
At C1 (and C3)
VEd = 16.6 × 6.0 × 9.6 × 0.45 + (10 + 0.2 × 0.3 × 25)*** × 1.25 × 6.0 = 516.5 kN <Concise EC2 Table 15.3>

3.5.5 Design grid line C

Effective depth, d
d = 300 − 30 − 20 / 2 = 260 mm
Flexure: column strip and middle strip, sagging
MEd = 140.5 kNm / m
K = MEd / bd2fck = 140.5 × 106 / (1000 × 2602 × 30) = 0.069
z / d = 0.94 <Concise EC2 Table 15.5>
z = 0.94 × 260 =244 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 140.5 × 106 / (244 × 500 / 1.15) = 1324 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.51%)
Try H20 @ 200 B1 (1570 mm2 / m)
Deflection: column strip and middle strip,
Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 <7.4.2(2), Concise EC2 Sec. 15.7>
where
N = 20.3 (ρ = 0.51%, fck = 30) <Concise EC2 Table 15.10>
K = 1.2 (flat slab) <Concise EC2 Table 15.11>
F1 = 1.0 (beff / bw = 1.0) <Concise EC2 Table 15.12>
F2 = 1.0 (no brittle partitions†††) <Concise EC2 Table 15.13>
F3 = 310 / σs
where
σs = σsn (As,req / As,prov) 1 / δ
where
σsn = (500 / 1.15) × (8.5 + 0.3 × 4.0) / 16.6 = 254 MPa
(or ≈ 253 MPa (From Concise EC2 Figure <Concise EC2 Fig. 15.3>
15.3 for Gk / Qk = 2.1, ψ2 = 0.3 and γg =
1.25) <Concise EC2 Table 15.14>
δ = redistribution ratio = 1.03
∴ σs ≈ 253 × (1324 / 1570) / 1.03 = 207 <Concise EC2 Fig. 15.3>
∴ F3 = 310 / 207 = 1.50‡‡‡
∴ Allowable l / d = 20.3 × 1.2 × 1.50 = 36.5
Actual l / d = 9500 / 260 = 36.5 ∴ OK§§§
Use H20 @ 200 B1 (1570)****

♣
As punching shear force (rather than a beam shear force) ‘effective’ span is not appropriate.
***
Cladding and strip of slab beyond centre of support.
†††
Otherwise for flat slabs 8.5 / 9.5 = 0.89 as span > 8.5 m. <7.4.2(2)>
‡‡‡
In line with Note 5 to Table NA.5, 1.50 is considered to be a maximum for 310 / σs.
§§§
Note: Continuity into columns will reduce sagging moments and criticality of deflection check (see Section 3.5.14).
****
Note requirement for at least 2 bars in bottom layer to carry through column <9.4.1(3)>

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 4 of 20

Flexure: column strip, hogging:
MEd = 222.3 kNm / m
K = MEd / bd2fck = 222.3 × 106 / (1000 × 2602 × 30) = 0.109
z / d = 0.89 <Concise EC2 Table 15.5>
z = 0.89 × 260 = 231 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 222.3 × 106 / (231 × 500 / 1.15) = 2213 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.85%)
Try H20 @ 125 T1 (2512 mm2 / m)††††
Flexure: middle strip, hogging:
MEd = 95.3 kNm / m
K = MEd / bd2fck = 95.3 × 106 / (1000 × 2602 × 30) = 0.069
z / d = 0.95 <Concise EC2 Table 15.5>
z = 0.95 × 260 = 247 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 95.3 × 106 / (247 × 500 / 1.15) = 887 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.34%)
Try H16 @ 200 T1 (1005 mm2 / m)
Requirements:
There is a requirement to place 50% of At within a width equal to <9.4.1(2)>
0.125 of the panel width on either side of the column.
Area required = (3 × 2213 + 3 × 887) / 2 mm2
= 4650 mm2
Within = 2 × 0.125 × 6.0 m = 1500 mm
i.e. require 4650 / 1.5 = 3100 mm2 / m for 750 mm either side of
the column centreline.
Use H20 @ 100 T2 (3140 mm2 / m)
750 mm either side of centre of support
(ρ = 0.60%)
In column strip, outside middle 1500 mm, requirement is for
Area required = 3.0 × 2213 – 16 × 314 mm2
= 1615 mm2
Within = in 3000 – 2 × 750 mm = 1500 mm
i.e. 1077 mm2 / m
Use H20 @ 250 T1 (1256 mm2 / m)
in remainder of column strip

In middle strip Use H16 @ 200 T1 (1005 mm2 / m)

Perpendicular to edge of slab at edge column:

Design transfer moment to column Mt = 0.17 bed2fck <9.4.2(1), I.1.2(5)>
where
be = cz + y = 400 + 400 = 800 mm <Fig. 9.9>
−6
Mt = 0.17 × 800 × 260 × 30 × 10 = 275.8 kNm
2

K = MEd / bd2fck = 275.8 × 106 / (800 × 2602 × 30) = 0.170

z / d = 0.82
z = 0.82 × 260 = 213 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 275.8 × 106 / (213 × 500 / 1.15) = 2978 mm2 / m

††††
The hogging moment could have been considered at face of support to reduce the amount of reinforcement
required.

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 5 of 20

 This reinforcement to be placed within cx + 2cy = 1100 mm <SMDSC>
2
Try 10 no. H20 T1 U-bars in pairs @ 200 (3140 mm ) local to column
(max. 200 mm from column)
Note:
Where a 200 × 200 hole occurs on face of column, be becomes 600 mm and pro rata,
As required becomes 2233 mm2 i.e. use 4 no. H20 each side of hole (2512 mm2).

Perpendicular to edge of slab generally

Assuming that there is partial fixity along the edge of the <9.3.1.2(2), 9.2.1.4(1) & NA>
slab, top reinforcement capable of resisting 25% of the
moment in the adjacent span should be provided OK
0.25 × 2213 = 553 mm / m 2

Check minimum area of reinforcement

As,min = 0.26 (fctm / fyk) btd ≥ 0.0013 btd <9.3.1.1 9.2.1.1>
where
bt = width of tension zone < Table 3.1>
fctm = 0.30 × fck0.666
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 300.666 × 1000 × 260 / 500 = 390 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.15%)
Use H12 @ 200 (565 mm2 / m)
The reinforcement should extend 0.2h from edge = 600 mm <9.3.1.4(2)>

3.5.6 Analysis grid line 1 (grid 3 similar)

Consider grid line 1 as being 9.6 / 2 + 0.4 / 2 = 5.0 m wide with continuous spans of
6.0 m. Column strip is 6.0 / 4 + 0.4 / 2 = 1.7 m wide. Consider perimeter load is
carried by column strip only. <5.1.1(4)>

Figure 3.21
Edge panel on grid 1 (grid 3 similar)

Actions
Permanent from slab gk = 5 × 8.5 kN / m2 = 42.5 kN / m
Variable from slab qk = 5 × 4.0 kN / m2 = 20.0 kN / m

Permanent perimeter load gk = 10.0 kN/m

Load combination and arrangement

As before, choose to use all-spans-loaded case and coefficients <5.1.3(1) & NA option c>
Ultimate load, n
By inspection, Exp. (6.10b) is critical. <Fig. 2.5>
n = 1.25 × (42.5 +10) + 1.5 × 20 = 95.6 kN / m <BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b)>

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 6 of 20

 Perimeter load, 10 × 1.25 = 12.5 kN / m <BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b)>

Effective span, leff

Effective span = 6000 – 2 × 400 / 2 + 2 × 300 / 2 = 5900 <5.3.2.2(1)>

Design moments in bay, MEd:

In spans (worst case, end span assuming pinned support)
MEd = 0.086 × 83.0 × 5.92 = 248.5 kNm <Concise EC2 Table 15.2>
At supports (worst case 1st support)
MEd = 0.086 × 83.0 × 5.92 = 248.5 kNm <Concise EC2 Table 15.2>
Additional moment in column strip only due to perimeter
load, spans (and supports, worst case)
MEd = 0.086 × 12.5 × 5.92 = 37.4 kNm

Apportionment to column strips and middle strips: <NA.3[1a], Fig. I.1>

Percentages
Column strip, 1.7 m wide Middle strip <Table I.1, CS Flat slab guide [29]>
-ve (hogging) Short span = 75% Short span = 25%
+ve (sagging) 50% 50%
Short span moments:
MEd
Column strip, 1.7 m wide Middle strip, 3.3 m wide
-ve (hogging) (0.75 × 248.5 + 37.4) / 1.70 0.25 × 248.5 / 3.3
= 131.6 kNm / m = 18.8 kNm / m
+ve (sagging) (0.50 × 248.5 + 37.4) / 1.70 0.50 × 248.5 / 3.3
= 95.1 kNm / m = 37.6 kNm / m

Punching shear force, VEd

For internal supports, as before = 516.5 kN
For penultimate support, 516.5 × 1.18 = 609.5 kN <Concise EC2 Table 15.3>

3.5.7 Design grid line 1 (grid 3 similar)

Cover:
cnom = 30 mm as before
d = 300 − 30 − 20 − 20 / 2 = 240 mm

Flexure: column strip, sagging:

MEd = 95.1 kNm / m
K = MEd / bd2fck = 95.1 × 106 / (1000 × 2402 × 30) = 0.055 <Concise EC2Table 15.5>
z/d = 0.95
z = 0.95 × 240 = 228 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 95.1 × 106 / (228 × 500 / 1.15) = 959 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.40%)
Try H16 @ 200 (1005 mm2 / m)

Deflection: column strip :

Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 <Concise EC2 Sec. 15.7>
where
N = 26.2 (ρ = 0.40%, fck = 30) <Concise EC2 Table 15.10>
K = 1.2 (flat slab) <Concise EC2 Table 15.11>

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 7 of 20

 F1 = 1.0 (beff / bw = 1.0) <Concise EC2 Table 15.12>
F2 = 1.0 (no brittle partitions) <Concise EC2 Table 15.13>
F3 = 310 / σs
where
σs = σsn (As,req / As,prov) 1 / δ
where
σsn ≈ 283 MPa (from Concise EC2 Figure 15.3 and <Concise EC2 Fig. 15.3>
Gk / Qk = 3.6, ψ2 = 0.3, γg = 1.25)
δ = redistribution ratio = 1.08 <Concise EC2 Table 15.14>
∴ σs ≈ 283 × (959 / 1005) / 1.08 = 250
∴ F3 = 310 / 250 = 1.24 <Concise EC2 Fig. 15.3>
∴ Allowable l / d = 26.2 × 1.2 × 1.24 = 39.0
Actual l / d = 5900 / 240 = 24.5 ∴ OK
Use H16 @ 200 B2 (1005 mm2 / m)

Flexure: middle strip, sagging

MEd = 37.6 kNm / m
By inspection, z = 228 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 37.6 × 106 / (228 × 500 / 1.15) = 379 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.56%)
By inspection, deflection OK
Check minimum area of reinforcement
As,min = 0.26 (fctm / fyk) btd ≥ 0.0013 btd <9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1>
where
bt = width of tension zone
fctm = 0.30 × fck0.666 <Table 3.1>
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 30 0.666
× 1000 × 240 / 500 = 361 mm / m
2

(ρ = 0.15%)
Use H12 @ 300 T2 (376 mm2 / m)

Flexure: column strip, hogging:

MEd = 131.6 kNm / m
K = MEd / bd2fck = 131.6 × 106 / (1000 × 2402 × 30) = 0.076 <Concise EC2 Table 15.5>
z / d = 0.928
z = 0.928 × 240 = 223 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 131.6 × 106 / (223 × 500 / 1.15) = 1357 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.56%)
Try H20 @ 200 T2 (1570 mm2 / m)‡‡‡‡

Flexure: middle strip, hogging:

MEd = 18.8 kNm / m
By inspection, z = 228 mm <Concise EC2 Table 15.5>
As = MEd / fydz = 18.8 × 106 / (228 × 500 / 1.15) = 190 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.08%)
As,min as before = 361 mm2 / m <9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1>
(ρ = 0.15%)
Try H12 @ 300 T2 (376 mm2 / m)

‡‡‡‡
The hogging moment could have been considered at face of support to reduce the amount of reinforcement required. This
should be balanced against the effect of the presence of a 200 × 200 hole at some supports which would have the effect of
increasing K but not unduly increasing the total amount of reinforcement required in the column strip (a 1.5% increase in
total area would been required).

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 8 of 20

 Requirements:
There is a requirement to place 50% of At within a width equal to 0.125 of the <9.4.1(2)>
panel width on either side of the column. As this column strip is adjacent to the
edge of the slab, consider one side only:
Area required = (1.5 × 1357 + 3.3 × 192) / 2 mm2
= 1334 m2
Within = 0.125 × 6.0 m = 750 mm of the column centreline.
i.e. require 1334 / 0.75 = 1779 mm2 / m for 750 mm from the column centreline
Allowing for similar from centreline of column to edge of slab:
Use 6 no. H20 @ 175T2(1794 mm2 / m)
(ρ = 0.68%)
between edge and to 750 mm from centre of support
In column strip, outside middle 1500 mm, requirement is for
1.7 × 1357 – 6 × 314 = 422 mm2 in 750 mm, i.e. 563 mm2 / m
Use H12 @ 175 T2 (646 mm2 / m) in remainder of column strip
In middle strip Use H12 @ 300 T2 (376 mm2 / m)

3.5.8 Analysis grid line 2

Consider panel on grid line 2 as being 9.6 / 2 + 8.6 / 2 = 9.1 m wide and continuous
spans of 6.0 m. Column strip is 6.0 / 3 = 3.0 m wide.

Figure 3.22
Internal panel on grid 2

Slab gk = 9.1 × 8.5 kN / m2 = 77.4 kN / m

Slab qk = 9.1 × 4.0 kN / m2 = 36.4 kN / m

Actions, load combination and arrangement:

Choose to use all-spans-loaded case <5.1.3(1) & NA option c>

Ultimate load, n
By inspection, Exp. (6.10b) is critical. <Fig. 2.5>
n = 1.25 × 77.4 + 1.5 × 36.4 = 151.4 kN / m <BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b)>

Effective span, leff

Effective span = 5900 mm as before <5.3.2.2(1)>

Design moments in bay, MEd:

Spans (worst case, end span assuming pinned support)
MEd = 0.086 × 151.4 × 5.92 = 453.2 kNm <Concise EC2 Table 15.2>
Support (worst case 1st support)
MEd = 0.086 × 151.4 × 5.92 = 453.2 kNm <Concise EC2 Table 15.2>
Additional moment in column strip only due to perimeter load

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 9 of 20

 Apportionment to column strips and middle strips:

MEd
Column strip, 3.0 m wide Middle strip, 6.1 m wide
-ve (hogging) 0.75 × 453.2 / 3.0 0.25 × 453.2 / 6.1
= 113.3 kNm / m = 18.5 kNm / m
+ve (sagging) 0.50 × 453.2 / 3.0 0.50 × 453.2 / 6.1
= 75.5 kNm / m = 37.1 kNm / m
Punching shear force, VEd, as before

3.5.9 Design grid line 2

Effective depth, d
d = 300 − 30 − 20 − 20 / 2 = 240 mm
Flexure: column strip, sagging:
MEd = 75.5 kNm / m
By inspection, z = 228 mm <Concise EC2 Table 15.5>
As = MEd / fydz = 75.5 × 106 / (228 × 500 / 1.15) = 761 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.32%)
Try H16 @ 250 (804 mm2 / m)
Deflection: column strip:
By inspection, OK.
Flexure: middle strip, sagging:
MEd = 37.1 kNm / m
By inspection, z = 228 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 37.1 × 106 / (228 × 500 / 1.15) = 374 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.55%)
By inspection, deflection OK. Try H10 @ 200 B2 (393 mm2 / m)
Flexure: column strip, hogging:
MEd = 113.3 kNm / m
K = MEd / bd2fck = 113.3 × 106 / (1000 × 2402 × 30) = 0.065 <Concise EC2 Table 15.5>
z / d = 0.94
z = 0.928 × 240 = 225 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 113.3 × 106 / (225 × 500 / 1.15) = 1158 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.48%)
Try H20 @ 250 T2 (1256 mm2 / m)§§§§
Flexure: middle strip, hogging:
MEd = 18.5 kNm / m
By inspection, z = 228 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 18.5 × 106 / (228 × 500 / 1.15) = 187 mm2 / m <Concise EC2 Table 15.5>
(ρ = 0.08%)
As before minimum area of reinforcement governs
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 300.666 × 1000 × 240 / 500 = 361 mm2 / m <9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1>
(ρ = 0.15%)
Try H12 @ 300 B2 (376 mm2 / m)
Requirements:
Regarding the requirement to place 50% of At within a width equal to 0.125 of <9.4.1(2)>

§§§§
The hogging moment could have been considered at face of support to reduce the amount of reinforcement
required.

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 10 of 20

 the panel width on either side of the column.
Area required = (3.0 × 1158 + 6.1 × 187) / 2 mm2
= 2307 mm2
Within = 2 × 0.125 × 6.0 m = 1500 mm centred on the column centreline.
i.e. require 2307 / 1.5 = 1538 mm2 / m for 750 mm either side of the column centreline.
Use H20 @ 200T2 (1570 mm2 / m)
750 mm either side of centre of support
(ρ = 0.60%)
In column strip, outside middle 1500 mm, requirement is for
3.0 × 1158 – 1.5 × 1570 = 1119 mm2 in 1500 mm, i.e. 764 mm2 / m
Use H16 @ 250 T2 (804 mm2 / m) in remainder of column strip

In middle strip se H12 @ 300 T2 (376 mm2 / m)

3.5.10 Punching shear, central column, C2

At C2, applied shear force, VEd = 1204.8 kN*****
Check at perimeter of column:
vEd = βVEd / uid < vRd,max <6.4.3(2), 6.4.5(3)>
where
β = factor dealing with eccentricity; recommended
value 1.15 <Fig. 6.21N & NA>
VEd = applied shear force
ui = control perimeter under consideration. <6.4.5(3)>
For punching shear adjacent to interior columns
u0 = 2(cx + cy) = 1600 mm
d = mean effective depth = (260 + 240) / 2 = 250 mm <Exp. (6.32)>
vEd = 1.15 × 1204.8 × 10 / 1600 × 250 = 3.46 MPa
3

vRd,max = 0.5νfcd <6.4.5(3) Note>

where
ν = 0.6(1 − fck / 250) = 0.528 <Exp. (6.6) & NA>
fcd = αccλfck / γc = 1.0 × 1.0 × 30 / 1.5 = 20
= 0.5 × 0.528 × 20 = 5.28 MPa ∴ OK <Concise EC2 Table 15.7†††††>
Check shear stress at basic perimeter u1 (2d from face of column): <6.4.2>
vEd = βVEd / u1d < vRd,c
where
β, VEd, d as before
u1 = control perimeter under consideration. <Fig. 6.13>
For punching shear at 2d from interior columns u1
= 2(cx + cy) + 2π × 2d = 4741 mm
vEd = 1.15 × 1204.8 × 103 / 4741 × 250 = 1.17 MPa
vRd,c = 0.18 / γc × k × (100ρlfck)0.333 <Exp. (6.47) & NA>
where
γc = 1.5
k = 1 + (200 / d)0.5 ≤ 2 k = 1 + (200 / 250)0.5 = 1.89
<6.4.4.1(1)>

*****
Column C2 is taken to be an internal column. In the case of a penultimate column, an additional elastic reaction factor
should have been considered.
†††††
At the perimeter of the column, vRd,max assumes the strut angle is 45°, i.e, that cot θ = 1.0.
Where cot θ = < 1.0, vRd,max is available from Concise EC2[10] Table 15.7.

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 11 of 20

 ρl = (ρlxρly)0.5 = (0.0085 × 0.0048)0.5 = 0.0064
where
ρlx, ρly = areas of bonded steel in a width of the
column plus 3d each side of column‡‡‡‡‡
fck = 30
vRd,c = 0.18 / 1.5 × 1.89 × (100 × 0.0064 × 30)0.333 = 0.61 MPa <Concise EC2 Table 15.6§§§§§>
∴ Punching shear reinforcement required

Perimeter required such that punching shear links are no longer required: <Exp. (6.54)>
uout = VEd × β / (d × vRd,c)
uout = 1204.8 × 1.15 × 103 / (250 × 0.61) = 9085 mm

Length of column faces = 4 × 400 = 1600 mm

Radius to uout = (9085 – 1600) / 2π = 1191 mm from face of column
Perimeters of shear reinforcement may stop 1191 – 1.5 × 250 = 816 m
from face of column <6.4.5(4) & NA>

Shear reinforcement (assuming rectangular arrangement of links)

sr,max = 250 × 0.75 = 187, say = 175 mm <9.4.3(1)>
Inside 2d control perimeter, st,max = 250 × 1.5 = 375, say 350 mm <9.4.3(2)>
Outside basic perimeter st,max = 250 × 2.0 = 500 mm
Assuming vertical reinforcement
at the basic control perimeter, u1, 2d from the column:
Asw ≥ (vEd – 0.75vRd,c) sr u1 / 1.5fywd,ef) <Exp. (6.52)>
Where
fywd,ef = effective design strength of reinforcement
= (250 + 0.25d) < fyd = 312 MPa <6.4.5(1)>
For perimeter u1
Asw = (1.17 – 0.75 × 0.61) × 175 × 4741 / (1.5 × 312) = 1263 mm2 per perimeter
Asw,min ≥ 0.08fck0.5(sr × st) / (1.5 fyk sin α + cos α) <Exp. (9.11)>
Where
Asw,min = area of a link leg
α = angle between main reinforcement and shear
reinforcement;
for vertical reinforcement sin α = 1.0
Asw,min ≥ 0.08 × 300.5 (175 × 350) / (1.5 × 500) = 36 mm2
∴ Try H8 legs of links in perimeters at 175 mm cc
Asw / u1 ≥ 1250 / 4741 = 0.26 mm2 / mm
Using H8 max. spacing = min[50 / 0.2; 1.5d] <9.4.3>
= min[192; 375] = 192 mm cc
∴ Use H8 legs of links at 175 mm cc around perimeters******

The values used here for ρlx, ρly ignore the fact that the reinforcement is concentrated over the support.
‡‡‡‡‡

Considering the concentration would have given a higher value of VRdc at the expense of further calculation to
determine ρlx, ρly at 3d from the side of the column.
§§§§§
vRd,c for various values of d and ρl is available from Concise EC2[10] Table 15.6.

******
Clause 6.4.5 provides Expression (6.52), which by substituting vEd for vRd,c, allows calculation of the area of required shear
reinforcement, Asw, for the basic control perimeter, u1. This should be considered as the required density of shear reinforcement. The

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 12 of 20

 which are also at 175 mm centres
2
Check 26 H8 legs of links (1250 mm ) in perimeter u1, 2d from column face
1st perimeter
1st perimeter to be > 0.3d but < 0.5d from face of column. <Fig. 9.10, 9.4.3(4)>
Say 0.4d = 100 mm from face of column

3.5.11 Punching shear, edge column

Assuming penultimate support,
VEd = 1.18 × 516.5 = 609.5 kN <Concise EC2 Table 15.3>

Check at perimeter of column

vEd = βVEd / uid < vRd,max <6.4.3(2), 6.4.5(3)>
where
β = factor dealing with eccentricity; recommended value 1.4
VEd = applied shear force <Fig. 6.21N & NA>
ui = control perimeter under consideration.
For punching shear adjacent to edge columns u0 = c2 +
3d < c2 + 2c1 <6.4.5(3)>
= 400 + 750 < 3 × 400 mm
= 1150 mm
d = as before 250 mm <Exp. (6.32)>
vEd = 1.4 × 609.5 × 10 / 1150 × 250 = 2.97 MPa
3

vRd,max as before = 5.28 MPa ∴ OK <6.4.5(3) Note>

Check shear stress at basic perimeter u1 (2.0d from face of column) <6.4.2>
vEd = βVEd / u1d < vRd,c
where
β, VEd and d as before
u1 = control perimeter under consideration. <Fig. 6.15>
For punching shear at 2d from edge column
columns u1 = c2 + 2c1+ π × 2d = 2771 mm
vEd = 1.4 × 609.5 × 103 / 2771 × 250 = 1.23 MPa
vRd,c = 0.18 / γc × k × (100 ρlfck)0.333 <Exp. (6.47) & NA>
where
γc = 1.5
k = as before = 1 +(200 / 250)0.5 = 1.89
ρl = (ρlxρly)0.5
where <6.4.4.1(1)
ρlx, ρly = areas of bonded steel in a width of the column
plus 3d each side of column.
ρlx = (perpendicular to edge) 10 no.H20 T2 + 6 no. H12
T2 in 2 × 750 + 400, i.e. 3818 mm2 in 1900 mm.
ρlx = 3818 / (250 × 1900) = 0.0080
ρly = (parallel to edge) 6 no. H20 T1 + 1 no. T12 T1 in
400 + 750 i.e. 1997 mm2 in 1150 mm. ρlY = 1997 /
(250 × 1150) = 0.0069
ρl = (0.0080 × 0.0069)0.5 = 0.0074

area of shear reinforcement required for any other perimeter should be based on this value, Asw / u1 together with the
requirements for minimum reinforcement and spacing of shear reinforcement (see Clause 9.4.3).

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 13 of 20

 fck = 30
vRd,c = 0.18 / 1.5 × 1.89 × (100 × 0.0074 × 30)0.333 = 0.64 MPa <See also Concise EC2 Table
15.6††††††>
∴ punching shear reinforcement required

Figure 3.23
Flexural tensile reinforcement adjacent to columns C1 (and C3)

Perimeter required where punching shear links no longer required

uout = 609.5 × 1.4 × 103 / (250 × 0.64) = 5333 mm <(Exp. 6.54)>

Length attributable to column faces = 3 × 400 = 1200 mm

∴ radius to uout from face of column
= say (5333 − 1200) / π = 1315 mm from face of column
Perimeters of shear reinforcement may stop 1370 – 1.5 × 250 = 940 mm
from face of column <6.4.5(4) & NA>
Shear reinforcement
As before, sr max. = 175 mm; st max. = 350 mm and <9.4.3(1) 9.4.3(2)>
fywd,ef = 312 MPa
For perimeter u1
Asw ≥ (vEd – 0.75vRd,c) sr u1 / 1.5fywd,ef <Exp. (6.52)
= (1.23 – 0.75 × 0.64) × 175 × 2771 / (1.5 × 312) = 777 mm2per perimeter
Asw,min ≥ 0.08 × 300.5 (175 × 350) / (1.5 × 500) = 36 mm2 <Exp. (9.11)>
Asw / u1 ≥ 777 / 2771 = 0.28 mm / mm
2

Using H8 max. spacing = 50 / 0.28 = 178 mm cc

∴Use H8 (50 mm2) legs of links at 175 mm cc around perimeters
perimeters at 175 mm centres
Check min. 16 H8 legs of links (800 mm2) in perimeter u1, 2d from column face

3.5.12 Punching shear, edge column with hole

Check columns D1 and D3 for 200 × 200 mm hole adjacent to
column.

††††††
vRd,c for various values of d and ρl is available from Concise EC2[10] Table 15.6.

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 14 of 20

As previously described use 4 H20 U-bars each side of column for
transfer moment.
Assuming internal support, VEd = 516.5 kN
Check at perimeter of column:
vEd = βVEd / uid < vRd,max <6.4.3(2), 6.4.5(3)>
where
β = factor dealing with eccentricity; recommended value 1.4 <Fig. 6.21N & NA>
VEd = applied shear force
ui = control perimeter under consideration. For punching shear
adjacent to edge columns u0 = c2 + 3d < c2 + 2c1 <6.4.5(3)>
= 400 + 750 < 3 × 400 mm
= 1150 mm
Allowing for hole, u0 = 1150 – 200 = 950 mm
d as before = 250 mm <Exp. 6.32>
vEd = 1.4 × 516.5 × 10 / 950 × 250 = 3.06 MPa
3

vRd,max as before = 5.28 MPa ∴ OK <6.4.5(3) Note>

Check shear stress at basic perimeter u1 (2.0d from face of column) <6.4.2>
vEd = βVEd / u1d < vRdc
where
β, VEd and d as before
u1 = control perimeter under consideration. For <Fig. 6.15>
punching shear at 2d from edge column columns u1
= c2 + 2c1+ π × 2d = 2771 mm
Allowing for hole
200 / (c1 / 2): x / ( c1 / 2 + 2d) <Fig. 6.14>
200 / 200: x / ( 200 + 500)
∴ x = 700 mm
u1 = 2771 – 700 = 2071 mm
vEd = 1.4 × 516.5 × 103 / 2071 × 250 = 1.40 MPa
vRd,c = 0.18 / γc × k × (100 ρlfck)0.333 <Exp. (6.47) & NA>
where
γc = 1.5
k = as before = 1 + (200 / 250)0.5 = 1.89
ρl = (ρlxρly)0.5
where
ρlx, ρly = areas of bonded steel in a width of the column plus 3d <6.4.4.1(1)
each side of column.
ρlx = (perpendicular to edge) 8 no.H20 T2 + 6 no.H12 T2 in
2 × 720 + 400 − 200, i.e. 3190 mm2 in 1640 mm.
ρlx = 3190 / (240 × 1640) = 0.0081
ρly = (parallel to edge) 6 no.H20 T1 (5 no. are effective)
+ 1 no. T12 T1 in 400 + 750 – 200, i.e. 1683 mm2 in 950 mm.
ρlY = 1683 / (260 × 950) = 0.0068
ρl = (0.0081 × 0.0068)0.5 = 0.0074
fck = 30
vRd,c = 0.18 / 1.5 × 1.89 × (100 × 0.0074 × 30)0.333 = 0.64 MPa <Concise EC2 Table 15.6‡‡‡‡‡‡>

‡‡‡‡‡‡
vRd,c for various values of d and ρl is available from Concise EC2 [10] Table 15.6

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 15 of 20

 ∴ punching shear reinforcement required

Figure 3.24
Flexural tensile reinforcement adjacent to columns D1 and D3

Perimeter required where punching shear links no longer required <Exp. (6.54)>
uout = 516.5 × 1.4 × 10 / (250 × 0.64) = 4519 mm
3

Length attributable to column faces = 3 × 400 = 1200 mm

Angle subtended by hole from centre of column D1 (See Figures 3.24 & 3.27) =
2 tan−1(100 / 200) = 2 × 26.5° = 0.927 rads.
∴ radius to uout from face of column
= say (4519 − 1200) / (π − 0.927) = 1498 mm from face of column
Perimeters of shear reinforcement may stop 1498 – 1.5 × 250 = 1123 mm
from face of column <6.4.5(4) & NA>

Shear reinforcement:
As before, sr max. = 175 mm; st max. = 350 mm and fywd,ef = 312 MPa <9.4.3(1) 9.4.3(2)>
For perimeter u1
Asw ≥ (vEd – 0.75vRd,c) sr u1 / 1.5fywd,ef) per perimeter <Exp. (6.52)>
= (1.40 – 0.75 × 0.64) × 175 × 2071 / (1.5 × 312) = 712 mm2 per perimeter
Asw,min ≥ 0.08 × 300.5 (175 × 350) / (1.5 × 500) = 36 mm2
Asw / u1 ≥ 712 / 2071 = 0.34 mm2 / mm
Using H8 (50 mm2) max. spacing = min[50 / 0.3; 1.5d]
= min[147; 375] = 147 mm cc No good
Try using H10, max. spacing = 78.5 / 0.34 = 231 mm cc, say 175 cc
∴ Use min. H10 (78.5 mm2) legs of links at 175 mm cc around perimeters
perimeters at 175 mm centres
Check min. 9 H10 legs of links (750 mm2) in perimeter u1, 2d from column face.
Note: As the requirement for these columns is for H10 links
change ALL links to H10 to avoid potential problems on site

3.5.13 Summary of design requirements

Grid C flexure
End supports:

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 16 of 20

 Column strip: 10 no. H20 U-bars
(max. 200 mm from column) in pairs
(where 200 × 200 hole use 8 H20 T1 in U-bars in pairs)
Middle strip: H12 @ 200 T1
Spans 1–2 and 2–3:
Column strip and middle strip: H20 @ 200 B
Central support:
Column strip centre: for 750 mm either side of support: H20 @ 100 T1
Column strip outer: H20 @ 250 T1
Middle strip: H16 @ 200 T1
Grid 1 (and 3) flexure:
Spans:
Column strip: H16 @ 200 B2*
Middle strip: H12 @ 300 B2
Interior support:
Column strip centre: 6 no. H20 @ 175 T2
Column strip outer: H12 @ 175 T2
Middle strip: H12 @ 300 T2
Grid 2 flexure:
Spans:
Column strip: H16 @ 250 B2*
Middle strip: H10 @ 200 B2

Interior support:
Column strip centre: H20 @ 200 T2* H16
Column strip outer: @ 250 T2
Middle strip: H12 @ 300 T2
Punching shear
Internal (e.g. at C2):
Use H10 legs of links in perimeters at max. 175 mm centres.
Max. tangential spacing of legs of links, st max. = 270 mm
Last perimeter, from column face, min. 767 mm
Edge (e.g. at C1, C3 assuming no holes):
Use H10 legs of links in perimeters at max. 175 mm centres.
Max. tangential spacing of legs of links, st max. = 175 mm
Last perimeter, from column face, min. 940 mm
Edge (e.g. at D1, D3 assuming 200 × 200 hole on face of column):
Use H10 legs of links in perimeters at max. 175 mm centres.
Max. tangential spacing of legs of links, st max. = 175 mm
Last perimeter, from column face, min. 1123 mm
Note
* rationalise centre of bars in column strips T2 and B2 to 175 mm centres to suit punching shear links.

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 17 of 20

Figure 3.25
Reinforcement details bay C–D, 1–2
Note
* Spacing rationalised to suit punching shear links.

Figure 3.26
Punching shear links at column C2 (102 no links) (column D2 similar)

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 18 of 20

 Figure 3.27
Punching shear links at column D1 (and D3) (penultimate support without hole similar)

3.5.14 Commentary on design

Method of analysis
The use of coefficients in the analysis would not usually be advocated in the design of such a
slab. Nonetheless, coefficients may be used and unsurprisingly, their use leads to higher
design moments and shears, as shown below.

Method Moment in 9.6 m Centre support Centre support

span per 6 m bay moment per 6 m bay reaction VEd
(kNm) (kNm) (kN)
Coefficients 842.7 952.8 1205
Continuous beam 747.0 885.6 1103
Plane frame columns 664.8 834.0 1060
below
Plane frame columns 616.8 798 1031
above and below

These higher moments and shears result in rather more reinforcement than when using other
more refined methods. For instance, the finite element analysis used in Guide to the design
and construction of reinforced concrete flat slabs[29] for this bay, leads to:
ƒ H16 @ 200 B1 in spans 1-2 (cf. H20 @ 200 B1 using coefficients),
ƒ H20 @ 125 T1 at support 2 (cf. H20 @ 100 T1 using coefficients) and
ƒ 3 perimeters of shear links at C2 for VEd = 1065 kN (cf. 5 perimeters using coefficients)
ƒ 2 perimeters of shear links at C3 (cf. 7 perimeters using coefficients)

Effective spans and face of support

<5.3.2.2(1)>
In the analysis using coefficients, advantage was taken of using effective spans to calculate
design moments. This had the effect of reducing span moments.

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 19 of 20

 <5.3.2.2(3)>
At supports, one may base the design on the moment at the face of support. This is borne
out by Guide to the design and construction of reinforced concrete flat slabs[29] that states
that hogging moments greater than those at a distance hc / 3 may be ignored (where hc is
the effective diameter of a column or column head). This is in line with BS 8110[30] and could
have been used to reduce support moments.

Shear reinforcement
H10 punching shear links are required for columns D1 and D3. Whilst the other columns were
found to require only H8s, H10s have been adopted throughout to avoid confusion in
detailing or on site. The cost differential would have been marginal.
With added area, the numbers of links could have been reduced on the other columns. A
rectangular arrangement (300 × 175 grid) of H10 links would have been possible. However,
as the grid would need to change orientation around the columns and as the reinforcement
in B2 and T2 is essentially at 175 centres, it is considered better to leave the regular square
grid arrangement.
Use of shear reinforcement in a radial arrangement, e.g. using stud rails, would have
simplified the shear reinforcement requirements.

Curtailment of reinforcement
In this design, the reinforcement would be curtailed and this would be done either in line
with previous examples or more practically in line with other guidance [20, 21].

WE 3 Flat Slabs v8b 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 20 of 20

 Worked Examples for Eurocode 2

Draft Version

All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate
the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and
application.

No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or
information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or
advisors.

Readers should note that this is a draft version of a document and will be subject to
revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the
latest version.
3 Slabs
3.1 General
The calculations in this section are presented in the following Sections:
3.2 A simply supported slab showing what might be deemed typical hand calculations.
3.3 A detailed version of the same simply supported slab but designed, and curtailment
lengths determined, strictly in accordance with the provisions of BS EN 1992–1–1.
3.4 A continuous ribbed slab designed, and curtailment lengths determined, strictly in
accordance with the provisions of BS EN 1992–1–1.
3.5 A bay of a flat slab.
They are intended to be illustrative of the Code and not necessarily best practice.

A general method of designing slabs is shown below.

1. Determine design life. <BS EN 1990 & NA Table

NA.2.1>
2. Assess actions on the slab. <BS EN 1991 & NAs>
3. Assess durability requirements and determine concrete <Table 4.1>
strength. <BS 8500-1: Tables A4 & A5>
4. Check cover requirements for appropriate fire resistance <BS EN 1992-1-2: Tables 5.8,
period. 5.9, 5.10 & 5.11>
5. Calculate minimum cover for durability, fire and bond <4.4.1>
requirements.
6. Determine which combinations of actions apply. <BS EN 1990 & NA Tables
NA.A1.1 & NA.A1.2 (B)>
7. Determine loading arrangements. <5.1.3(1) & NA>
8. Analyse structure to obtain critical moments and shear <5.4, 5.5, 5.6>
forces.
9. Design flexural reinforcement. <6.1>
10. Check deflection. <7.4>
11. Check shear capacity. <6.2>
12. Other design checks:
Check minimum reinforcement. <9.3.1.1(1), 9.2.1.1(1)>
Check cracking (size or spacing of bars). <7.3, Tables 7.2N & 7.3N>
Check effects of partial fixity. <9.3.1.2(2)>
Check secondary reinforcement. <9.3.1.1(2), 9.3.1.4(1)>
13. Check curtailment. <9.3.1.1(4), 9.2.1.3, Fig. 9.2>
14. Check anchorage. <9.3.1.2, 8.4.4, 9.3.1.1(4),
9.2.1.5(1), 9.2.1.5(2)>
15. Check laps. <8.7.3>

3.2 Simply supported one-way slab (simple version)

This calculation is intended to show a typical hand calculation.

A 175 mm thick slab is required to support screed, finishes, an office variable action of 2.5
kN / m2 and demountable partitions (@ 2 kN / m). The slab is supported on load-bearing
block walls. fck = 30, fyk = 500. Assume a 50-year design life and a requirement for 1 hour
resistance to fire.

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 1 of 30

 Figure 3.1
Simply supported slab (simple version)

3.2.1 Actions
kN / m2

Permanent
Self-weight 0.175 × 25 = 4.4 <BS EN 1991-1-1 Table A1>
50 mm screed = 1.0
Finishes, services = 0.5
gk = 5.9
Variable
Offices, general use B1 = 2.5
Movable partitions @ 2.0 kN / m = 0.8 <BS EN 1991-1-1 Tables 6.1, 6.2
& NA>
qk = 3.3 <BS EN 1991-1-1, 6.3.1.2 (8)>

3.2.2 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom

cnom = cmin + Δcdev <Exp. 4.1>

where
cmin = max[cmin,b; cmin,dur]
where
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond <4.4.1.2(3)>
= diameter of bar
Assume 12 mm main bars
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions
Assuming XCI and using C30 / 37 concrete, <Table 4.1, BS 8500-1
cmin,dur = 15 mm Table A4>
Δcdev = allowance in design for deviation.
Assuming no measurement of cover <4.4.1.2(3)>
Δcdev = 10 mm
∴ cnom = 15 + 10 = 25 mm
Fire
Check adequacy of section for 1 hour fire resistance (i.e. REI 60)
Thickness, hs,min = 80 mm cf. 175 mm proposed ∴ OK <BS EN 1992-1-2
4.1(1), 5.1(1), Table 5.8>
Axis distance, amin = 20 mm cf. 25 + φ / 2 = 31 i.e. not critical
∴ OK
cnom = 25 mm

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 2 of 30

3.2.3 Load combination (and arrangement)
Ultimate load, n
By inspection, BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b) governs <Fig. 2. 5>
∴ n = 1.25 × 5.9 + 1.5 × 3.3 = 12.3 kN / m2 <BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b)>

3.2.4 Analysis
Design moment
MEd = 12.3 × 4.82 / 8 = 35.4 kNm
Shear force
V = 12.3 × 4.8 / 2 = 29.5 kN / m

3.2.5 Flexural design

Effective depth
d = 175 − 25 − 12 / 2 = 144 mm
Flexure in span
K = MEd / bd2fck = 35.4 × 106 / (1000 × 1442 × 30) <Fig. 3.5>
=0.057 <Appendix A.1>
<Concise Table 15.5>
z / d = 0.95
z = 0.95 × 144 = 137 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 35.4 × 106 / (137 × 500 / 1.15) = 594 mm2 / m
(ρ = 0.41%)
Try H12 @ 175 B1 (645 mm2 / m)

3.2.6 Deflection
Check span-to-effective-depth ratio
Basic span-to-effective-depth ratio for ρ = 0.41% = 20 <Table 7.4N & NA>
As,prov / As,req = 645 / 599 = 1.08 <Exp. (7.17)>
Max. span = 20 × 1.08 × 144 = 3110 mm i.e. < 4800 mm ∴ no good

Consider in more detail:

Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 <7.4.2, Concise Sec. 15.7>
where <Concise Table 15.10>
N = 25.6 (ρ = 0.41%, fck = 30) <Concise Table 15.11>
K = 1.0 (simply supported) <Concise Table 15.12>
F1 = 1.0 (beff / bw = 1.0) <Concise Table 15.13>
F2 = 1.0 (span < 7.0 m)
F3 = 310 / σs
where
σs = σsn (As,req / As,prov) 1 / δ
where
σsn ≈ 242 MPa (From Concise Figure 15.3 and <Concise Fig. 15.3>
gk / qk = 1.79, ψ2 = 0.3, γg = 1.25)
δ = redistribution ratio = 1.0
∴ σs ≈ 242 × 594 / 645 = 222 <Concise Fig. 15.3>
∴ F3 = 310 / 222 = 1.40

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 3 of 30

 ∴ Allowable l / d = 25.6 × 1.40 = 35.8
Actual l / d = 4800 / 144 = 33.3 ∴ OK
Use H12 @ 175 B1 (645 mm2 / m)

3.2.7 Shear
By inspection, OK
However, if considered critical
V = 29.5 kN / m as before
VEd= 29.5 ‒ 0.14 × 12.3 = 27.8 kN / m <6.2.1(8)>
vEd = 27.8 × 103 / 144 × 103 = 0.19 MPa
vRd,c =0.53 MPa <6.2.2(1), Concise Table 15.6>
∴ No shear reinforcement required

3.2.8 Summary of design

Figure 3.2
Simply supported slab: summary

Note
It is presumed that the detailer would take this design and detail the slab to normal best
practice, e.g. to SMDSC[21]. This would usually include dimensioning and detailing
curtailment, laps, U-bars and also undertaking the other checks detailed in Section 3.2.9.

3.2.9 Other design/detailing checks

Minimum area of reinforcement
As,min = 0.26 (fctm / fyk) btd ≥ 0.0013 btd <9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1>
where
bt = width of tension zone
fctm = 0.30 × fck0.666 <Table 3.1>
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 30 0.666
× 1000 × 144 / 500 = 216 mm / m2

( 0.15%)
∴ H12 @ 175 B1 OK
Crack control
OK by inspection <Table 7.2N & NA>
Curtailment main bars
Curtail main bars 50 mm from or at face of support. <SMDSC[21] Fig. 6.4; How to,
Detailing>
At supports
50% of As to be anchored from face of support <9.3.1.2.(1)>
Use H12 @ 350 B1 T1 U-bars
In accordance with SMDSC[21] detail MS3 lap U-bars 500 mm
with main steel, curtail T1 leg of U-bar 0.1l (= say 500 mm) from
face of support.

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 4 of 30

 Maximum spacing of bars
< 3h < 400 mm OK <9.3.1.1.(3)>
Secondary reinforcement
20% As,req = 0.2 × 645 = 129 mm2 / m <9.3.1.1.(2)>
Use H10 @ 350 (224) B2
Edges: effects of assuming partial fixity along edge
Top steel required = 0.25 × 594 = 149 mm2 / m <9.3.1.2.(2)>
Use H10 @ 350 (224) T2 B2 as U bars
extending 960 mm into slab‡

3.3 Continuous one-way solid slab

This calculation is intended to show in detail the provisions of designing a slab to Eurocode
2 using essentially the same slab as used in Example 3.2.

A 175 mm thick continuous slab is required to support screed, finishes, an office variable
action of 2.5 kN / m2 and demountable partitions (@ 2 kN / m). The slab is supported on
200 mm wide load-bearing block walls at 6000 mm centres. fck = 30, fyk = 500 and the design
life is 50 years. A fire resistance of 1 hour is required.

Figure 3.3
Continuous solid slab

3.3.1 Actions
kN / m2
Permanent
As Section 3.2 gk = 5.9
Variable
As Section 3.2 qk = 3.3 <BS EN 1991-1-1
6.3.1.2(8)>

3.3.2 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom

As Section 3.2 cnom = 25 mm

‡
A free unsupported edge is required to use ‘longitudinal and transverse reinforcement’ <9.3.1.4(1)>
generally using U-bars with legs at least 2h long. For slabs 150 mm deep or greater, SMDSC [21]
standard detail recommends U-bars lapping 500 mm with bottom steel and extending 0.1l top into
span.

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 5 of 30

3.3.3 Load combination (and arrangement)
Ultimate action (load)
As Section 3.2, BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b) governs <Fig. 2.5>
∴ n = 1.25 × 5.9 + 1.5 × 3.3 = 12.3 kN / m2 <BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b)>

3.3.4 Analysis
Clear span, lk = 5800
a1 = min[h / 2; t / 2] = min[175 / 2; 200 / 2] = 87.5 <5.3.2.2(1)>
a2 = min[h / 2; t / 2] = min[175 / 2; 200 / 2] = 87.5
leff = 5975
Bending moment
End span MEd = 0.086 × 12.3 × 5.9752 = 37.8 kNm / m <5.1.1(7), Concise Table 15.2>
1st internal support MEd = 0.086 × 12.3 × 5.9752 = 37.8 kNm / m <5.1.1(7), Concise Table 15.2>
Internal spans and supports
MEd = 0.063 × 12.3 × 5.9752 = 27.7 kNm / m <5.1.1(7), Concise Table 15.2>
Shear
End support VEd = 0.40 × 12.3 × 5.975 = 29.4 kN / m <5.1.1(7), Concise Table 15.2>
1st interior support VEd = 0.60 × 12.3 × 5.975 = 44.1 kN / m <5.1.1(7), Concise Table 15.2>

3.3.5 Flexural design: span

End span (and 1st internal support)
Effective depth, d
d = h ‒ cnom ‒ φ / 2
= 175 ‒ 25 ‒ 12 / 2 = 144 mm
Relative flexural stress , K
K = MEd / bd2fck = 37.8 × 106 / 1000 × 1442 × 30 = 0.061
K′ = 0.207 <Appendix A1>
or restricting x / d to 0.45
K′ = 0.168
∴ by inspection, section is under-reinforced (i.e. no
compression reinforcement required)
Lever arm, z
z = (d / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d <Fig. 3.5>
= (144 / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 × 0.061)0.5] = 0.945d = 136 mm <Appendix A1>
Area of steel, As
As = MEd / fydz
= 37.8 × 106 / (500 / 1.15 × 136) = 639 mm2 / m
(0.44%)
Try H12 @ 175 B1 (645 mm2 / m)

Internal spans and supports

Lever arm z
By inspection, z = 0.95d = 0.95 × 144 = 137 mm <Fig. 3.5>
<Appendix A1>

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 6 of 30

 Area of steel, As
As = MEd / fydz
= 27.7 × 106 / (500 / 1.15 × 137) = 465 mm2 / m
(0.32%)
Try H12 @ 225 B1 (502 mm2 / m)

3.3.6 Deflection: end span

Check end span-to-effective-depth ratio
Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3
where
N = basic effective depth to span ratio:
ρ = 0.44%
ρ0 = fck0.5 × 10−3 = 0.55% ∴ use Exp. (7.16a) <7.4.2(2)>
N = 11 + 1.5f ckρ0 / ρ + 3.2f
0.5
(ρ0 / ρ − 1)
ck
0.5 1.5
<Exp. (7.16a)>
= 11 + 1.5 × 300.5× 0.55 / 0.44 + 3.2 × 300.5 (0.55 / 0.44 – 1)1.5
= 11.0 + 10.3 + 2.2 = 23.5

K = structural system factor <7.4.2>

= 1.3 (end span of continuous slab)
F1 = flanged section factor <7.4.2>
= 1.0 (beff / bw = 1.0)
F2 = factor for long spans associated with brittle partitions <7.4.2>
= 1.0 (span < 7.0 m)
F3 = 310 / σs
where <7.4.2>
σs = (fyk / γs) (As,req / As,prov) (SLS loads / ULS loads) (1 / δ) <Exp. (7.17) &
= fyd × (As,req / As,prov) × (gk+ ψ2 qk) / (γGgk + γQqk) (1 / δ) BS EN 1990 A1.2.2>
= (500 / 1.15) × (639 / 645) × [(5.9 + 0.3 × 3.3) / 12.3] × 1.08§ <Concise Table 15.14>
= 434.8 × 0.99 × 0.56 × 1.08 = 260 MPa
F3 = 310 / 260 = 1.19
Note: As,prov / As,req ≤ 1.50 <Table 7.4N & NA>
Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3
= 23.5 × 1.3 × 1.0 × 1.19
= 36.4
Max. span = 36.4 × 144 = 5675 mm, i.e. < 5795 mm ∴ No good

Try H12 @ 150 B1 (754 mm2 / m)

σs = 434.8 × 639 / 754 × 0.56 × 1.08 = 223
F3 = 310 / 223 = 1.39
Allowable l / d = 23.5 × 1.3 × 1.0 × 1.39
= 42.5
Max. span = 42.5 × 144 = 6120 mm, i.e. > 5795 mm OK
∴ H12 @ 150 B1 (754 mm2 / m) OK

§
The use of Concise Table 15.2 implies certain amounts of redistribution which are defined in Concise
table 15.14.

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 7 of 30

3.3.7 Deflection: internal span
Check end span-to-effective-depth ratio
Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3
where
N = basic effective depth to span ratio:
ρ = 0.32%
ρ0 = fck0.5 × 10−3 = 0.55% ∴ use Exp. (7.16a) <7.4.2(2)>
N = 11 + 1.5fck0.5 ρ0 / ρ + 3.2fck0.5 (ρ0 / ρ − 1)1.5 <Exp. (7.16a)>
= 11 + 1.5 × 30 × 0.55 / 0.32 + 3.2 × 30 (0.55 / 0.32 – 1)
0.5 0.5 1.5

= 11.0 + 14.1 + 10.7 = 35.8

K = structural system factor <7.4.2>
= 1.5 (interior span of continuous slab)
F1 = flanged section factor <7.4.2>
= 1.0 (beff / bw = 1.0)
F2 = factor for long spans associated with brittle partitions <7.4.2>
= 1.0 (span < 7.0 m)
F3 = 310 / σs
where <7.4.2>
σs = fyd × (As,req / As,prov) × (gk + ψ2 qk) / (γGgk + γQqk) (1 / δ) <Exp. (7.17) &
= (500 / 1.15) × (465 / 502) × [ (5.9 + 0.3 × 3.3) / 12.3] × 1.03 BS EN 1990 A1.2.2>
= 434.8 × 0.93 × 0.56 × 1.03 = 233 MPa <Concise Table 15.14>

∴ F3 = 310 / 233 = 1.33

Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3
= 35.8 × 1.5 × 1.0 × 1.33
= 71.4
Max. span = 71.4 × 144 = 10280 mm i.e. > 5795 mm OK
Use H12 @ 225 B1 (502 mm2 / m) in internal spans

3.3.8 Shear
Design shear force, VEd
At d from face of end support
VEd = 29.4 ‒ (0.144 + 0.0875) × 12.3 = 26.6 kN / m <6.2.1(8)>
At d from face of 1st interior support
VEd = 44.1 ‒ (0.144 + 0.0875) × 12.3 = 41.3 kN / m

Shear resistance, VRd,c

VRd,c = (0.18 / γc)k (100ρ l f ck )0.333 bwd ≥ 0.0035k 1.5 f ck 0.5 b w d <6.2.2(1)>
where
k = 1 + (200 / d)0.5 ≤ 2.0 as d < 200 mm
k = 2.0
ρl = Asl / bd
Assuming 50% curtailment (at end support)
= 50% × 754 / (144 × 1000) = 0.26%
VRd,c = (0.18 / 1.5) × 2.0 × (100 × 0.26 / 100 × 30)0.33 × 1000 × 144
= 0.12 × 2 × 1.97 × 1000 × 144
= 0.47 × 1000 × 144 = 68.1 kN / m
But VRd,cmin = 0.035k1.5fck0.5 bwd
where

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 8 of 30

 k = 1 + (200 / d)0.5 ≤ 2.0; as before k = 2.0
VRd,cmin = 0.035 × 21.5 × 300.5 × 1000 × 144
= 0.54 × 1000 × 144 = 77.6 kN / m
∴ VRd,c = 77.6 kN / m
∴ OK; no shear reinforcement required at end or 1st internal supports
∴H12 @ 150 B1 & H12 @ 175 T1 OK
By inspection, shear at other internal supports OK.

3.3.9 Summary of design

Figure 3.4
Continuous solid slab: design summary
Note
It is presumed that the detailer would take this design and detail the slab to normal best practice. This would usually include rationalising,
dimensioning and detailing curtailment, laps, U-bars and also undertaking the other checks detailed in 3.3.10 to 3.3.14. The determination
of curtailment lengths, anchorages and laps is shown in detail using the principles in Eurocode 2. In practice these would be determined
from published tables of data or by using reference texts [12, 21].

3.3.10 Other design/detailing checks

a) Minimum area of reinforcement
As,min = 0.26 (fctm / fyk) btd ≥ 0.0013 btd <9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1>
where
bt = width of tension zone
fctm = 0.30 × fck 0.667 <Table 3.1>
2
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 30 0.667
× 1000 × 144 / 500 = 216 mm / m
(0.15%)
∴H12 @ 225 B1 OK
b) Secondary (transverse reinforcement)
Minimum 20% As,req <9.3.1.1(2)>
20% As,req = 0.2 × 502 = 100 mm / m 2

Consider As,min to apply as before. <SMDSC>

2
As,min = 216 mm / m
Try H10 @ 350 B2 (224 mm2 / m)
Check edge
Assuming partial fixity exists at edges, 25% of As is required <9.3.1.2(2)>
to extend 0.2 × the length of the adjacent span. As,req = 25%
× 639 = 160 mm2 / m
As,min as before = 216 mm2 / m <9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1>
∴ Use H10 @ 350 (224 mm / m) U-bars at edges
2

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 9 of 30

 Curtail 0.2 × 5975 = 1195 mm, say 1200 mm measured from face of support** <9.3.1.2(2)>

c) Maximum spacing of bars, < 3h < 400 mm OK <9.3.1.1.(3)>

d) Crack control
As slab < 200 mm, measures to control cracking are <7.3.3(1)>
unnecessary.

However, as a check on end span: <7.3.3(2), 7.3.1.5>

Loading is the main cause of cracking
∴ use Table 7.2N or Table 7.3N for wmax = 0.4 mm and σ = 241
MPa (see deflection check),
Max. bar size = 20 mm <Table 7.2N & interpolation>
or max. spacing = 250 mm <Table 7.3N & interpolation>
∴ H12 @ 150 B1 OK.

e) End supports: effects of partial fixity

Assuming partial fixity exists at end supports, 15% of As is <9.3.1.2(2)>
required to extend 0.2 × the length of the adjacent span.
As,req = 15% × 639 = 96 mm2 / m
But, As,min as before = 216 mm2 / m <9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1>
(0.15%)
One option would be to use bob bars, but choose to use U-bars
Try H12 @ 450 (251 mm2 / m) U - bars at supports
Curtail 0.2 × 5975 = say, 1200 mm measured from face of support†† <9.3.1.2(2)>

3.3.11 Curtailment
a) End span, bottom reinforcement
Assuming end support to be simply supported, 50% of As
should extend into the support. <9.3.1.2(1) >
50% × 639 = 320 mm2 / m
Try H12 @ 300 (376 mm2 / m) at supports
In theory, 50% curtailment of reinforcement may take place al <9.3.1.2(1) Note, 9.2.1.3 (2)>
from where the moment of resistance of the section with the
remaining 50% would be adequate to resist the applied
bending moment. In practice, it is usual to determine the
curtailment distance as being al from where MEd = MEd,max / 2.
Thus: for a single simply supported span supporting a UDL of n,
MEd,max = 0.086nl 2 ; RA = 0.4nl
At distance, X, from end support, moment,
MEd@X = RAX – nX 2 / 2
∴ when M@X = MEd,max / 2:
0.086nl 2 / 2 = 0.4nlX – nX 2 / 2
Assuming X = xl
0.043nl 2 = 0.4nlxl – nx 2 l 2 / 2
0.043 = 0.4x – x2 / 2
0 = 0.043 − 0.4x + x2 / 2

**
Detail MS2 of SMDSC[21], suggests 50% of T1 legs of U-bars should extend 0.3l (= say 1800 mm)
from face of support by placing U-bars alternately reversed.
††
Detail MS2 of SMDSC[21], suggests 50% of T1 legs of U-bars should extend 0.3l (= say 1800 mm)
from face of support by placing U-bars alternately reversed.

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 10 of 30

 x = 0.128 or 0.672, say 0.13 and 0.66
∴ at end support 50% moment occurs at 0.13 × span
0.13 × 5975 = 777 mm
Shift rule: for slabs al may be taken as d ( = 144 mm) <9.2.1.3 (2) , 6.2.2(5)>
∴ curtail to 50% of required reinforcement at 777 – 144 = 633 mm
from centreline of support
Say 500 mm from face of support A
∴ in end span at 1st internal support 50% moment occurs at
0.66 × span
0.66 × 5975 = 3944 mm
Shift rule: for slabs al may be taken as d (= 144 mm) <9.2.1.3 (2) , 6.2.2(5)>
∴ curtail to 50% of required reinforcement at 3944 + 144
= 4088 mm from support A or 5975 – 4088 = 987 mm from
centreline of support B Say 850 mm from face of support B

Figure 3.5
Curtailment of bottom reinforcement: actions, bending moments, forces in reinforcement and
curtailment

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 11 of 30

 b) 1st interior support, top reinforcement
Presuming 50% curtailment of reinforcement is required this may take place al <9.3.1.2(1) Note, 9.2.1.3 (2)>
from where the moment of resistance of the section with the remaining 50%
would be adequate. However, it is usual to determine the curtailment distance
as being al from where MEd = MEd,max / 2.
Thus, for the 1st interior support supporting a UDL of n,
MEd,maxT = 0.086nl 2 ; RB = 0.6nl
At distance Y from end support, moment,
MEd@y = MEd,maxT – RAY + nY 2 / 2
∴ when M@y = MEd,maxT / 2
0.086nl 2 / 2 = 0.086nl 2 – 0.6nlY + nY 2 / 2
Assuming Y = yl
0.043nl 2 = 0.086nl 2 – 0.6nlyl + ny 2 l 2 / 2
0 = 0.043 − 0.6y + y2 / 2
y = 0.077 (or 1.122), say 0.08
∴ at end support 50% moment occurs at 0.08 × span
0.08 × 5975 = 478 mm
Shift rule: for slabs, al may be taken as d 144 mm <9.2.1.3 (2), 6.2.2(5)>
∴ curtail to 50% of required reinforcement at478 + 144
= 622 mm from centreline of support
50% of reinforcement may be curtailed at, say, 600 mm from either face
of support B
100% curtailment may take place al from where there is no
hogging moment. Thus:
when M@y = MEd,maxT / 2 :
0 = 0.086nl 2 – 0.6nlY + nY 2 / 2
Assuming Y = yl
0 = 0.086 – 0.6y + y2 / 2
y = 0.166 (or 1.034), say 0.17
∴ at end support 50% moment occurs at 0.17 × span
0.17 × 5975 = 1016 mm
Shift rule: for slabs al may be taken as d
∴ curtail to 100% of required reinforcement at 1016 + 144
= 1160 mm from centreline of support
100% of reinforcement may be curtailed at, say 1100 mm from either face of
support B

c) Support B bottom steel at support

At the support 25% of span steel required <9.3.1.1(4), 9.2.1.5(1), 9.2.1.4(1)>
0.25 × 639 = 160 mm2
As,min as before = 216 mm2 / m <9.3.1.1, 9.2.1.1>
For convenience use H12 @ 300 B1 (376 mm2 / m)

3.3.12 Anchorage at end support

As simply supported 50% of As should extend into the support. This <9.2.1.2 (1) & Note, 9.2.1.4(2)>
50% of As should be anchored to resist a force of
FE = VEd × al / z <Exp. (9.3)>

‡‡
Maximum z = 0.947 at mid span and greater towards support.

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 12 of 30

 where
VEd = the absolute value of the shear force
al = d, where the slab is not reinforced for shear <9.2.1.3(2)>
z = lever arm of internal forces
FE = 29.4 × d / 0.95‡‡ d = 30.9 kN / m
Anchorage length, lbd <8.4.4>
lbd = αlb,rqd ≥ lb,min <Exp. (8.4)>
where
α = conservatively 1.0
lb,rqd = basic anchorage length required
= (φ / 4) (σsd / fbd) <Exp. (8.3)>
where
φ = diameter of the bar = 12 mm

σsd = design stress in the bar at the ultimate limit state

= FE / As,prov
= 30.9 × 1000 / 376 =81.5 MPa
fbd = ultimate bond stress <8.4.2(2)>
= 2.25 η1 η2 fct,d
where
η1 = 1.0 for ‘good’ bond conditions and 0.7 for all
other conditions = 1.0
η2 = 1.0 for bar diameter ≤ 32 mm
fct,d = design tensile strength
= αct fct,k / γc. For fck = 30 MPa
= 1.0 × 2.0 / 1.5 = 1.33 MPa <3.1.6(2) & NA, Table 3.1 Table
2.1N>
fbd = 2.25 × 1.33 =3.0 MPa
lb,rqd = (12 / 4) (81.5 / 1.33) =183 mm
lb,min = max(10d, 100 mm) = 120 mm <Exp. (8.6)>
lbd = 183 mm measured from face of support <Fig. 9.3>
By inspection, using U-bars, OK.

3.3.13 Laps
Lap H12 @ 300 U-bars with H12 @ 150 straights
Tension lap, l0 = α1 α2 α3 α5 α6 lb,rqd α l0min <Exp. (8.10)>
where
α1 = 1.0 (straight bars) <Table 8.2>
α2 = 1 − 0.15 (cd − φ) / φ
where
cd = min(pitch, side cover or cover) <Fig. 8.4>
= 25 mm
φ = bar diameter
= 12 mm
α2 = 0.84 <Table 8.2>
α3 = 1.0 (no confinement by reinforcement)
α5 = 1.0 (no confinement by pressure)
α6 = 1.5 <Table 8.3>
<Exp. (8.3)>
lb,rqd = (φ / 4) σsd / fbd
where

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 13 of 30

 σsd = the design stress at ULS at the position from where
the anchorage is measured.
Assuming lap starts 500 mm from face of support
(587.5 mm from centreline of support):
MEd = 29.5 × 0.59 − 12.3 × 0.592 / 2
= 15.2 kNm
σsd = MEd / (Asz)
= 15.2 × 106 / (376 × 144 / 0.95) =267 MPa
fbd = ultimate bond stress <8.4.2(2)>
= 2.25 η1η2 fct,d
where
η1 = 1.0 for ‘good’ conditions
η2 = 1.0 for ϕ < 32 mm
fct,d = αct fct,k / γc
where
αct = 1.0 <3.1.6 (2) & NA>
fct,k = 2.0 <Table 3.1>
γc = 1.5 <Table 2.1N & NA>

= 2.25 × 2.0 / 1.5 = 3.0 MPa

lb,rqd = (ϕ / 4) σsd / fbd

= (12 / 4) × (267 / 3) = 267 mm
<Exp. 8.6>
l0min b = max[0.3 α6 lb,rqd; 15ϕ; 200 mm]
= max[0.3 × 1.5 × 229; 15 × 12; 200]
= max[124; 180; 200] = 200 mm
∴ l0 = α1 α2 α3 α5 α6 lb,rqd ≥ l0min
= 1.0 × 0.84 × 1.0 × 1.0 × 1.5 × 329 ≥ 200 = 414 mm
But good practice suggests minimum lap of max[tension lap; 500]
∴ lap with bottom reinforcement = 500 mm starting 500 from <SMDSC[21] MS2>
face of support.

3.3.14 Summary of details

Figure 3.6
Continuous solid slab: reinforcement details

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 14 of 30

 Figure 3.7
Reinforcement details at edge

3.4 Continuous ribbed slabs

Figure 3.8
Continuous ribbed slab example

This 300 mm deep ribbed slab is required for an office to support a variable action of 5 kN / m2.
It is supported on wide beams that are the same depth as the slab, as shown in Figure 3.9.

Figure 3.9
Long section through slab

One hour fire resistance required: internal environment. Ribs are 150 mm wide @ 900 mm
cc. Links are required in span to facilitate prefabrication of reinforcement. Assume that

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 15 of 30

 partitions are liable to be damaged by excessive deflections. In order to reduce
deformations yet maintain a shallow profile use fck = 35 MPa and fyk = 500 MPa.

Notes on ribbed slab design

There are various established methods for analysing ribbed slabs and dealing with the solid
areas:

ƒ Using UDLs simplifies the analysis and remains popular. One method is to ignore the
weight of the solid part of the slab in the analysis of the ribbed slab (and the weight of
the solid area added to the supporting beam actions). This ignores the effect the solid
areas have on bending in the ribbed slab.
ƒ Alternatively the weight of the solid part of the slab is spread as a UDL over the whole
span. This is conservative both in terms of moment and shears at solid/shear interfaces
but underestimates hogging in internal spans.
ƒ The advent of computer analysis has made analysis using patch loads more viable and
the resulting analysis more accurate.
ƒ The ribbed part of the slab may be designed to span between solid areas. (The ribs span
d / 2 into the solid areas which are assumed to act as beams in the orthogonal
direction.) However, having to accommodate torsions induced in supporting beams and
columns usually makes it simpler to design from centreline of support to centreline of
support.
ƒ Analysis programs can cope with the change of section and therefore change of stiffness
along the length of the slab. Moments would be attracted to the stiffer, solid parts at
supports. However, the difference in stiffnesses between the ribbed and the solid parts
is generally ignored.

In line with good practice analysis, this example is carried out using centreline of support to
centreline of support and patch loads§§. Constant stiffness along the length of the slab has
been assumed.

3.4.1 Actions
Permanent: UDL kN / m2
Self-weight:
Rib 0.15 × 0.2 × 25 / 0.9 = 0.833
Slope 2 × (1 / 2) × 0.2 / 10 × 0.2 × 25 / 0.9 = 0.112
Slab 0.1 × 2.5 = 2.500
Cross rib 0.19 × 0.71 × 0.2 × 25 / (0.9 × 7.5) = 0.100
Total self-weight = 3.545 3.55
Ceiling 0.15
Services 0.30
Raised floor 0.30
Total permanent actions = 4.30

Permanent: Patch load

Extra over solid in beam area as patch load
(0.2 × 25 – 0.833) = 4.167 = 4.17

§§
In this case, assuming the patch load analysis is accurate, assuming the weight of solid area is
spread over the whole span would overestimate span and support moments by 6 – 8% and shears at
the solid/rib interface by 8 – 9%. Ignoring the weight of the solid area in the analysis of this ribbed slab
would lead to underestimates of span moments by 1%, support moments by 3% and no difference in
the estimation of shear at the solid shear interface. This may have been the preferred option!

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 16 of 30

 Variable
Imposed = 4.00 <Client requirement>
Allowance for partitions = 1.00 <Client requirement>
Total variable load = = 5.00

3.4.2 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom

cnom = cmin + Δcdev <Exp. (4.1)>

where
cmin = max(cmin,b, cmin,dur)
where
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond <4.4.1.2(3)>
= diameter of bar.
Assume 20 mm main bars and 8 mm links
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions.
Assuming XC1 and C30/37 concrete , cmin,dur = 15 mm <Table 4.1 BS 8500-1
Table A4>
Δcdev = allowance in design for deviation. Assuming no
measurement of cover Δcdev = 10 mm < 4.4.1.2(3)>

∴ cnom = 20 + 10 to main bars or

= 15 + 10 to links – critical
Fire
Check adequacy of section for REI 60 <BS EN 1992-1-2 5.7.5(1)>
Minimum slab thickness, ηs = 80 mm OK <BS EN 1992-1-2 Table 5.8>
Axis distance required
Minimum rib width bmin = 120 mm with a = 25 mm <BS EN 1992-1-2
or bmin = 200 mm with a = 12 mm Table 5.6>
∴ at 150 mm wide (min.) a = 20 mm
By inspection, not critical
Use 25 mm nominal cover to links

Figure 3.10
Section AA: section through ribbed slab

3.4.3 Load combination and arrangement

Ultimate load, n
By inspection, Exp. (6.10b) is critical. <Fig. 2.5>
nslab = 1.25 × 4.30 + 1.5 × 5.0 = 13.38 kN / m2 <BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b)>

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 17 of 30

 nsolid areas = 1.25 × (4.30 + 4.17) + 1.5 × 5.0 = 18.59 kN / m2

Arrangement
Choose to use all-and-alternate-spans-loaded <5.1.3(1) & NA option b>

3.4.4 Analysis
Analysis by computer, includes 15% redistribution at support and <BS EN 1990 A1.2.2
none in the span.*** & NA, 5.3.1 (6)>

a) Elastic moments b) Redistributed envelope

Figure 3.11
Bending moment diagrams

Figure 3.12
Redistributed shears, kN / m

At solid/rib interface
AB @ 550 mm from A
MEd (sagging) = 20.4 kNm / m ≡ 18.3 kNm / rib
VEd = 32.5 kN / m ≡ 29.3 kN / rib

***
Note 1: A ribbed slab need not be treated as discrete elements provided rib spacing ≤ 1500 mm, depth of
the rib ≤ 4 × its width, the flange is > 0.1 × distance between ribs and transverse ribs are provided at
a clear spacing not exceeding 10 × overall depth of the slab.
Note 2: As 7.5 m < 85% of 9.0 m, coefficients presented in Concise Eurocode 2[10] are not applicable.

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 18 of 30

 BA @1000 mm from B
MEd (hogging) = 47.1 kNm / m ≡ 42.4 kNm / rib
VEd = 45.4 kN / m ≡ 40.9 kN / rib
BC @ 1000 mm from B
MEd (hogging) = 43.0 kNm / m ≡ 38.7 kNm / rib
VEd = 45.1 kN / m ≡ 40.6 kN / rib
Symmetrical about centreline of BC.

3.4.5 Flexural design, span AB

Span AB – Flexure
MEd = 61.7 kNm / m
= 55.5 kNm / rib

K = MEd / bd2fck
where
b = 900 mm
d = 300 − 25 – 8 – 20 / 2 = 257
assuming 8 mm link at H20 in span
fck = 35
= 55.5 × 106 / (900 × 2572 × 35) = 0.027
K′ = 0.207 <Appendix A1>
or restricting x / d to 0.45
K′ = 0.168
K ≤ K′ ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression
reinforcement required.
z = (d / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d <Appendix A1>
= (257 / 2) (1 + 0.951) ≤ 0.95 × 257
= 251 ≤ 244 ∴ z = 244 mm
But z = d – 0.4x <Appendix A1>
∴ x = 2.5(d − z) = 2.5(257 − 244) = 33 mm
∴ By inspection, neutral axis is in flange
As = MEd / fydz
where
fyd = 500 / 1.15 = 434.8 MPa
= 55.5 × 106 / (434.8 × 244) = 523 mm2 / rib
Try 2 no.H20 / rib (628 mm2 / rib)
Span AB - Deflection
Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 <Concise Sec. 15.7>
where
N = Basic l / d: check whether ρ > ρ0 and whether to <7.4.2(2)>
use Exp. (7.16a) or Exp. (7.16b)
ρ0 = fck0.5 / 1000 = 350.5 / 1000 = 0.59%
ρ = As / Ac††† = As,req / [bwd + (beff − bw)hf] <PD 6687>
where
bw = min. width between tension and compression
chords. At bottom assuming 1 / 10 slope to rib:
= 150 + 2 × (25 + 8 + 20 / 2) / 10
= 159 mm

Section 2.18 of PD 6687 [5] suggests that ρ in T-beams should be based on the area of concrete
†††

above the centroid of the tension steel.

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 19 of 30

 ρ = 523 / (159 ( 257 + (900 − 159) × 100)
= 523 / 114963
= 0.45%
ρ < ρ0 ∴ use Exp. (7.16a)
N = 11 + 1.5 fck0.5 ρ0 / ρ + 3.2fck0.5 (ρ0 / ρ − 1)1.5] <Exp. (7.16a)>
= 11 + 1.5 × 350.5 × 0.055 / 0.045 + 3.2 × 350.5 (0.055 /
0.045 − 1)1.5
= [11 + 10.8 + 2.0] = 22.8
K = (end span) 1.3 <Table 7.4N & NA>
F1 = (beff / bw = 5.66) 0.8 <7.4.2(2)>
F2 = 7.0 / leff = 7.0 / 7.5 = (span > 7.0 m) 0.93 <7.4.2(2)>
F3 = 310 / σs
where
σs = (fyk / γs) (As,req / As,prov) (SLS loads / ULS loads) (1 / δ)
= 434.8(523 / 628) [ (4.30 + 0.3 × 5.0) / 13.38] (65.3 / 61.7‡‡‡)
= 434.8 × 0.83 × 0.43 × 1.06
= 164 MPa
F3 = 310 / σs
= 310 / 164 = 1.89§§§ = say 1.50
∴ Permissible l / d = 22.8 × 1.3 × 0.8 × 0.93 × 1.50 = 33.0
Actual l / d = 7500 / 257 = 29.2 ∴ OK
Use 2 no.H20 / rib (628 mm2 / rib)

Support A (and D): flexure (sagging) at solid/rib interface

Reinforcement at solid/rib interface needs to be designed for <9.2.1.3.(2)>
both moment and for additional tensile force due to shear
(shift rule)
MEd,max = 18.3 kNm / rib
VEd,max = 29.3 kNm / rib
At solid/rib interface
As = MEd / fydz + ΔFtd / fyd <9.2.1.3.(2), Fig. 9.2>
where
z = (d / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d
where
K = MEd / bd2fck
where
b = 900 mm
d = 300 − 25 – 8 – 25 − 20 / 2 = 232
assuming 8 mm links and H25 B in edge beam
fck = 30
= 18.3 × 106 / (900 × 2322 × 35) = 0.011

‡‡‡
In analysis, 15% redistribution of support moments led to redistribution of span moments:
δ = 61.7 / 65.3 = 0.94
§§§
Both As,prov / As,req and any adjustment to N obtained from Exp. (7.16a) or Exp. (7.16b) is restricted
to 1.5 by Note 5 to Table NA.5 in the UK NA. Therefore, 310 / σs is restricted to 1.5.

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 20 of 30

 Figure 3.13
Section at solid/rib intersection

∴ z = (232 / 2) (1 + 0.980) ≤ 0.95 × 232 <Appendix A1>

= 230 ≤ 220 ∴ z = 220 mm

fyd = 434.8 MPa

ΔFtd = 0.5VEd (cot θ – cot α) <6.2.3(7), Exp. (6.18)>
where
θ = angle between the concrete compression strut and the <6.2.3(1)>
beam axis. Assume cot θ = 2.5 (as a maximum) <Appendix A2, Concise Table
α = angle between shear reinforcement and the beam axis. 15.6>
For vertical links, cot α = 0 <6.2.3(1)>
ΔFtd = 1.25VEd = 1.25 × 29.3 = 36.6 kN

As = 18.3 × 106 / (434.8 × 220) + 36.6 × 103 / 434.8

= 191 + 84 mm2 = 275 mm2
∴Try 1 no. H20 B in end supports****

Support B (and C) (at centreline of support)

MEd = 77.1 kNm / m
= 69.4 kNm / rib
K = MEd / bd2fck
where
d = 300 − 25 cover − 12 fabric − 8 link − 20 / 2
= 245
K = 69.4 × 106 / (900 × 2452 × 35) = 0.037
By inspection, K ≤ K′
z = (245 / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 K)0.5] ≤ 0∙95d
= (245 / 2) (1 + 0.932) < 0.95d
= 237 mm
As = MEd / fydz
= 69.4 × 106 / 434.8 × 237 = 673 mm2 / rib

Support B (and C): flexure (hogging) at solid/rib interface

Reinforcement at solid/rib interface needs to be designed for <9.2.1.3.(2)>
both moment and for additional tensile force due to shear
(shift rule)

****
An alternative method would have been to calculate the reinforcement required to resist MEd at the
shift distance, al, from the interface

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 21 of 30

 MEd,max = 42.4 kNm / rib max.
VEd,max = 40.9 kNm / rib max.
As = MEd / fydz + ΔFtd / fyd <9.2.1.3.(2)>
where
z = (245 / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 K)0.5] ≤ 0∙95d
where
K = MEd / bd2fck
= 42.4 × 106 / (150 × 2452 × 35)
= 0.135
K′’ for δ = 0.85 (i.e. 15% redistribution) = 0.168 <Concise Table 15.4,
Appendix A>
∴ Section under-reinforced: no compression reinforcement required
∴z = (245 / 2) (1 + 0.723) ≤ 232 = 211 mm

fyd = 434.8 MPa

<6.2.3(7), Exp. (6.18)>
ΔFtd = 0.5VEd (cot θ – cot α)
where
θ = angle between the concrete compression strut and the <6.2.3(1)>
beam axis. Assume cot θ = 2.5 (as a maximum) <Appendix A2, Concise Table
α = angle between shear reinforcement and the beam axis. 15.6>
For vertical links, cot α = 0 <6.2.3(1)>
ΔFtd = 1.25VEd = 1.25 × 40.9 = 51.1 kN
As = 42.4 × 106 / (434.8 × 211) + 51.1 × 103 / 434.8
= 462 + 117 mm2 = 579 mm2 / rib
To be spread over beff where by inspection, beff = 900. <9.2.1.2(2)>
∴Centre of support more critical (679 mm2 / rib required). <5.3.2.1(3)>
Top steel may be spread across beff where <9.2.1.2(2), 5.3.2>
beff = bw + beff1 + beff2 ≤ b
= bw + 2 × 0.1 × 0.15 × (l1 + l2)
= 150 + 0.03 × (7500 + 9000) ≤ 900
= 645 mm
∴ Use 2 no.H16 above rib and 3 no.H12 between (741 mm2 / rib)
where 2 no.H16 and 2 no.H12 are within beff

3.4.6 Flexural design, span BC

Span BC – Flexure
MEd = 55.9 kNm / m
= 50.3 kNm / rib
K = MEd / bd2fck
= 50.3 × 106 / 900 × 2572 × 35
= 0.02 i.e. ≤ K′ (as before K′ = 0.168)
By inspection,
z = 0.95d = 0.95 × 257 = 244 mm
By inspection, neutral axis is in flange.
As = MEd / fydz
= 50.3 × 106 / 434.8 × 244 = 474 mm2
Try 2 no. H20 / rib (628 mm2 / rib)
Span BC – Deflection
Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 <Concise Sec. 15.7>
where

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 22 of 30

 N = Basic l / d <7.4.2(2)>
ρ = 474 / (159 (× 257 + (900 − 159) × 100)
= 474 / 114963
= 0.41%
ρ0 = 0.59% (for fck = 30)
∴ ρ < ρ0 use Exp. (7.16a)
N = 11 + 1.5 fck ρ0 / ρ + 3.2fck (ρ0 /ρ − 1)
0.5 0.5 1.5
<Exp. (7.16a)>
= 11 + 1.5 × 35 × 0.055 / 0.041 + 3.2 × 350.5 (0.055 / 0.041 − 1)1.5
0.5

= 11 + 11.9 + 3.8 = 26.7

K = (internal span) 1.5 <Table 7.4N & NA>
F1 = (beff / bw = 6.0) 0.8 <7.4.2(2)>
F2 = 7.0 / leff = 7.0 / 9.0 = (span > 7.0 m) 0.77 <7.4.2(2)>
F3 = 310 / σs
where
σs = (fyk / γs) (As,req / As,prov) (SLS loads / ULS loads) (1 / δ)
= 434.8 × (474 / 628) [(4.30 + 0.3 × 5.0) / 13.38](61.1 / 55.9)
= 434.8 × 0.75 × 0.43 × 1.09
= 153 MPa
F3 = 310 / σs
= 310 / 153 = 2.03, say = 1.50††††
∴ Permissible l / d = 26.8 × 1.5 × 0.8 × 0.77 × 1.50 = 37.1
Actual l / d = 9000 / 257 = 35 ∴ OK
∴Use 2 H20 / rib (628 mm2 / rib)

3.4.7 Design for shear

Figure 3.14
Section through rib

Support A (and D) at solid/rib interface

Shear at solid/rib interface = 29.3 kN / rib
Taking solid area as the support, at d from face of support <6.2.1(8)>
VEd = 29.3 − 0.232 × 0.90 × 13.38 = 26.5 kN / rib
Resistance <6.2.2(1) & NA>
VRdc = (0.18 / γc)k (100ρl fck)0.333 bwd
where
γc = 1.5

††††
Both As,prov / As,req and any adjustment to N obtained from Exp. (7.16a) or Exp. (7.16b) is restricted
to 1.5 by Note 5 to Table NA.5 in the UK NA.

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 23 of 30

 k = 1 + (200 / d)0.5 ≤ 2
= 1 + (200 / 257)0.5
= 1.88
ρl = Asl / bwd
where
Asl = assume only 1 H20 anchored = 314 mm2
bw = min. width between tension and compression chords.
At bottom assuming 1 / 10 slope to rib:
= 150 + 2 × (25 + 8 + 20 / 2) / 10
= 159 mm
d = 257 mm as before
ρl = 314 / (159 × 257) = 0.0077
fck = 35
∴ VRdc = (0.18 / 1.5) 1.88 (100 × 0.0077 × 35)0.333 × 159 × 257
= 0.68 × 159 × 257 = 27.8 kN / rib
∴ No shear links required <6.2.1(5)>
But use nominal links to allow prefabrication.
Support B (and C) at solid/rib interface
Shear at solid/rib interface = 40.9 kN / rib [max(BA, BC)]
At d from face of support <6.2.1(8)>
VEd = 40.9 − 0.245 × 13.38 × 0.9 = 37.9 kN/rib
Resistance <6.2.2(1) & NA>
VRdc = (0.18 / γc)k (100ρl fck)0.333 bwd
where
γc = 1.5
k = 1 + (200 / d)0.5 ≤ 2
= 1 + (200 / 245)0.5
= 1.90
ρl = Asc / bwd
where
Asl = 2 H16 = 402 mm2
bw = 159 mm as before
d = 245 mm as before
ρl = 0.0103
fck = 35
∴ VRdc = (0.18 / 1.5) 1.9 (100 × 0.0103 × 35)0.333 × 159 × 245
= 0.75 × 159 × 245 = 29.2 kN / rib
∴ Shear links required
Shear links required for a distance:
(37.9 − 29.2) / (13.38 × 0.9) + 245 = 722 + 245 = 967 mm from interface
Check shear capacity
VRd,max = αcw bw zνfcd / (cot θ + tan θ) <Exp. (6.9) & NA>
where
αcw = 1.0
bw = 159 mm as before
z = 0.9d
ν = 0.6 (1 − fck / 250) = 0.528
fcd = 35 / 1.5 = 23.3 MPa
θ = angle of inclination of strut.
Rearranging formula above:
(cot θ + tan θ) = αcwbwzνfcd / VEd
= (1.0 × 159 × 0.9 × 245 × 0.528 × 23.3)

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 24 of 30

 41.6 × 103
= 10.4
By inspection, cot−1θ << 21.8. But cot θ restricted to 2.5 and <6.2.3(2) & NA>
∴ tan θ = 0.4.
VRd,max= 1.0 × 159 × 0.9 × 245 × 0.528 × 20 / (2.5 + 0.4) = 127.6 kN
∴ OK
Shear links: shear resistance with links
VRd,s = (Asw / s) z fywd cot θ ≤ VRd,max <Exp. (6.8)>
where
Asw / s = area of legs of links/link spacing
z = 0.9d as before
fywd = 500 / 1.15 = 434.8
cot θ = 2.5 as before
∴ for VEd ≤ VRd,s
Asw / s ≥ VEd / z fywd cot θ
≥ 37.9 × 103 / (0.9 × 245 × 434.8 × 2.5) ≥ 0.158
Maximum spacing of links = 0.75d = 183 mm <9.2.2(6)>
∴ Use H8 @ 175 cc in 2 legs (Asw / s = 0.57) for min. 967 mm into rib

3.4.8 Indirect supports

As the ribs of the slab are not supported at the top of the supporting beam <9.2.5, Fig. 9.7>
sections (A, B, C, D), additional vertical reinforcement should be provided in
these supporting beams and designed to resist the reactions. This additional
reinforcement should consist of links within the supporting beams (see Beams
design, Section 4. 4.9).
Support A (and D) at solid/rib interface:
VEd = 26.5 kN / rib
As,req = 26.3 × 1000 / (500 / 1.15) = 60 mm2 <Fig. 9.7>
This area is required in links within h / 6 = 300 / 6 = 50 mm of the
ribbed/solid interface and within h / 2 = 300 / 2 = 150 mm of the
centreline of the rib.
Support B (and C) at solid/rib interface,
VEd = 37.9 kN / rib
As,req = 37.9 × 1000 / (500 / 1.15) = 87 mm2 placed similarly

3.4.9 Summary of design

Figure 3.15
Summary of design

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 25 of 30

3.4.10 Other design/detailing checks
a) Minimum area of reinforcement in flange
As,min = 0.26 (fctm/ fyk) btd ≥ 0.0013 btd <9.3.1.1
where 9.2.1.1, Exp. (9.1N)>
bt = width of tension zone
fctm = 0.30 × fck 0.666 <Table 3.1>
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 35 0.666
× 1000 × 100 / 500 = 166 mm / m
2

(0.17%)
∴ Use A142 in flange (say OK) <BS 8666[28]>
b) Secondary reinforcement
Not applicable

c) Maximum spacing of bars, < 3 h < 400 mm

By inspection OK <9.3.1.1.(3)>

d) Crack control
Loading is the main cause of cracking ∴ use Table 7.2N or <7.3.3(2)
Table 7.3N for wmax = 0.3 mm and max. σs = 200 MPa (see 7.3.1.5>
deflection check)
Max. bar size = 25 mm <Table 7.2N>
or max. spacing = 250 mm <Table 7.3N>
OK by inspection.
e) Effects of partial fixity
Assuming partial fixity exists at end supports, 15% of As is <9.3.1.2(2)>
required to extend 0.2 × the length of the adjacent span.
As,req = 15% × 525 = 79 mm2 / rib
For the rib in tension:
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 300.666 × 159 × 257 / 500 = 55 mm2 / rib

3.4.11 Curtailment
Wherever possible simplified methods of curtailing reinforcement would be followed. The
following is intended to show how a rigorous assessment of curtailment of
reinforcement might be undertaken.
End support A: bottom steel at support
Check anchorage
As simply supported, 25% of As should be anchored in support. <9.3.1.1(4), 9.3.1.2(1) & Note,
25% × 595 = 148 mm2 9.2.1.4(1) & NA>
Use 1 no.H20 / rib (314 mm2 / rib)
Check anchorage length
Envelope of tensile force:
To resist envelope of tensile force, provide reinforcement to al <9.3.1.1(4), 9.2.1.3(1), 9.2.1.3(2),
or lbd beyond centreline of support. 9.2.1.3(3) Fig. 9.2>
For members without shear reinforcement, al = d = 232 <9.2.1.3>
By inspection, σsd = 0, lbd = lbd,min = max(10φ, 100 mm)

Indirect support:
As anchorage may be measured from face of indirect support, <9.3.1.1(4), 9.2.1.4(2), 9.2.1.4(3),
check, force to be resisted at solid/rib interface: Fig. 9.3b>
Fs = MEd / z + FE

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 26 of 30

 where
MEd = 18.3 kNm / rib <Exp. (9.3)>
z = 220 as before
FE = VEd × al / z
where <9.2.1.3, Exp (9.2)>
VEd= 29.3 kN / rib
al = z cot θ / 2
∴ FE = VEd cot θ / 2
= 29.3 × 1.25 = 36.6 kN / rib
Fs = 18.6 × 106 / (220 × 103) + 36.6 = 121.1 kN

Anchorage length
lbd = αlb,rqd ≥ lb,min <8.4.4, Exp. (8.4)>
where:
α = conservatively 1.0
lb,rqd = (ϕ / 4) (σsd / fbd) <Exp. (8.3)>
where
ϕ = 20
σsd = design stress in the bar at the ULS
= 121.1 × 1000 / 314 = 385 MPa
fbd = ultimate bond stress
= 2.25 η1 η2 fct,d <8.4.2 (2)>
where
η1 = 1.0 for good bond conditions
η2 = 1.0 for bar diameter ≤ 32 mm
<3.1.6 (2),Tables 3.1 and 2.1 and
fct,d = αct fct,k / γc
NA>
= 1.0 × 2.2 / 1.5
= 1.47 MPa
fbd = 2.25 × 1.47 = 3.31 MPa
∴ lb,rqd = (20 / 4) (385 / 3.31) = 581 mm <Fig. 9.3>
lb,min = max[10ϕ; 100 mm] = 200 mm
∴ lbd= 581 mm measured from solid/rib intersection.
i.e. 31 mm beyond centreline of support‡‡‡‡.
End support A: top steel
Assuming partial fixity exists at end supports, 15% of As is required <9.3.1.2(2)>
to extend at least 0.2 × the length of the adjacent span§§§§.
As,req = 15% × 525 = 79 mm2 / rib
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 350.666 × 159 × 257 / 500 = 68 mm2 / rib <9.3.1.1
9.2.1.1(1), Exp. (9.1N)>
Use 2 no. H12 T1 / rib in rib and 2 H10 T1 / rib between ribs
(383 mm2 / rib)
Support B (and C): top steel
At the centreline of support (2 H16 T + 3 H12 T) / rib are
required. The intention is to curtail in two stages, firstly to 2
H16 T / rib then to 2 H12 T / rib.
Curtailment of 2 H16 T / rib at support (capacity of 2 H12 T / rib + shift rule)

‡‡‡‡
Whilst this would comply with the requirements of Eurocode 2, it is common practice to take
bottom bars 0.5 × a tension lap beyond the centreline of support (= 250 mm beyond the centreline of
support; see MS1 in SMDSC[21]).
§§§§
It is usual to curtail 50% of the required reinforcement at 0.2l and to curtail the remaining 50%
at 0.3l or line of zero moment (see MS2 in SMDSC[21]).

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 27 of 30

 Assume use of 2 H12 T throughout in midspan:
Assuming z = 211 mm as before,
MR2H12T = 2 × 113 × 434.8 × 211
= 20.7 kNm / rib (23.0 kNm / m)
(Note: section remains under-reinforced)
From analysis MEd = 23.0 kNm / m occurs at 2250 mm
(towards A) and 2575 mm (towards B).
Shift rule: αl = z cot θ / 2
Assuming z = 211 as before
αl = 1.25 × 211 = 264 mm
∴ 2 no.H12 T are adequate from 2250 + 264 = 2513 mm from B
towards A and 2575 + 263 = 2838 mm from B towards C.
∴ Curtail 2 no.H16 T @ say 2600 from BA and 2850 from BC
Curtailment of 3 no.H12 T / rib at support (capacity of 2 H16 T / rib + shift rule)
MR2H16T = 2 × 201 × 434.8 × 211
= 36.9 kNm / rib (41.0 kNm / m)
(Note: section remains under-reinforced)
From analysis MEd = 41.0 kNm / m occurs at 1310 mm (towards A)
and 1180 mm (towards C).
Shift rule: αl = 263 mm as before
∴ 2 no.H16 T are adequate from 1310 + 263 = 1573 mm from B
towards A and 1180 + 263 = 1443 mm from B towards C.
∴Curtail 3 no. H12 at say 1600 from B (or C).

Figure 3.16
Curtailment of top reinforcement at B per rib

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 28 of 30

 Support B (and C) bottom steel at support
At the support 25% of span steel required <9.3.1.1(4), 9.2.1.5(1),
9.2.1.4(1)>
0.25 × 628 = 157 mm2
Try 1 no.H16 B / rib (201)
This reinforcement may be anchored into indirect support or <Fig. 9.4>
carried through.

Support B (and C): bottom steel curtailment BA and BC

To suit prefabrication 2 no.H20 / rib will be curtailed at
solid/rib interface, 1000 mm from BA (B towards A) and BC.
From analysis, at solid/rib interface sagging moment = 0.
From analysis, at solid/rib interface + al, i.e. at 1000 + 1.25 × 244
= 1303 mm
at 1305 mm from BA sagging moment = say 5 kNm / rib
at 1305 mm from BC sagging moment = 0
Use 1 no.H16 B / rib (201)

3.4.12 Laps
At AB, check lap 1 no.H20 B to 2 no.H20 B in rib full tension lap
l0 = α1 α6 lb,rqd > l0,min <Exp. (8.10)>
where
α1 = 1.0 (cd = 45 mm, i.e. < 3ϕ) <Table 8.2>
α6 = 1.5 (as > 50% being lapped)
lb,rqd = (ϕ / 4) (σsd / fbd)
where
ϕ = 20
σsd = 434.8
fbd = 3.0 MPa as before
l0,min = max. 10ϕ or 100 = 200 Exp. (8.6)
l0 = 1.0 × 1.5 × (20 / 4) × 434.8 / 3.0
= 1087 mm, say = 1200 mm <SMDSC[21]>
At BA and BC, check lap 2 no. H12 T to 2 no. H16 T in rib – full tension lap
l0 = α1 α6 lb,rqd > l0,min <Exp. (8.10)>
where
α1 = 0.7 (cd = 45 mm, i.e. > 3ϕ) <Table 8.2>
α6 = 1.5 (as > 50% being lapped)
lb,rqd = (ϕ / 4) (σsd / fbd)
where
ϕ = 12
σsd = 434.8
fbd = 2.1 (3.0 MPa as before but η1 = 0.7 for not <8.4.2 (2)>
good bond conditions)
l0,min = max. 10ϕ or 100 = 120 Exp. (8.6)

l0 = 0.7 × 1.5 × (12 / 4) × 434.8 / 2.1

= 651 mm, say = 700 mm <SMDSC[21]>
But to aid prefabrication take to solid/rib intersection 1000 mm
from centre of support.

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 29 of 30

 At BA and BC, check lap 1 H16 B to 2 H20 B in rib
By inspection, nominal say, 500 mm <SMDSC[21]>

3.4.13 Other checks

Check shear between web and flange
By inspection, VEd ≤ 0.4 fct,d ∴ OK <6.4.2 (6) & NA>

3.4.14 RC detail of ribbed slab

Figure 3.17
Curtailment of flexural reinforcement in ribbed slab

WE 3 Slabs v7c 17 Sep.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 30 of 30

 Worked Examples for Eurocode 2

Draft Version

All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate
the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and
application.

No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or
information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or
advisors.

Readers should note that this is a draft version of a document and will be subject to
revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the
latest version.
6 Walls
6.1 General
Walls are defined as being vertical elements whose lengths are four times greater than
their thicknesses. Their design does not differ significantly from the design of columns in
that axial loads and moments about each axis are assessed and designed for.
Generally, the method of designing walls is as follows:
1. Determine design life. <BS EN 1990 & NA Table NA 2.1>
2. Assess actions on the column. <BS EN 1991 (10 parts) & UK
NAs>
3. Determine which combinations of actions <BS EN 1990 & NA Tables NA
apply. A1.1 & NA A1.2(B)>
4. Assess durability requirements and determine <BS 8500–1>
concrete strength.
5. Check cover requirements for appropriate fire <Approved Document B
resistance period. BS 1992–1–2>
6. Determine cover for fire, durability and bond. <BS EN 1992–1–1 Cl. 4.4.1>
7. Analyse structure for critical combination <BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 5>
moments and axial forces.
8. Check slenderness and determine design <BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 5.8>
moments.
9. Determine area of reinforcement required. <BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 6.1>
10. Check spacing of bars <BS EN 1992–1–1 Sections 8 & 9>
Example 6.2 shows the design of a simple linear shear wall as typically used in medium rise
buildings. Similar principals may be applied to walls that are shaped as C, L, T, Z and rectangles
in-plan but issues of limiting flange dimensions and shear at corners need be addressed. The
example shows only ULS design as, apart from minimum areas of steel to control cracking, SLS
issues are generally non-critical in medium-rise structures. For shear walls in high-rise
structures, reference should be made to specialist literature (ref to CIRIA R102 Design of shear
wall buildings).

6.2 Shear wall (Wall A)

Wall ‘A’ is 200 mm thick and in addition to providing vertical support to 200 mm flat slabs at
roof level and floors 1 to 3, it helps to provide lateral stability to the four storey office block.
Assuming the stair itself provides no lateral stability, the wall is to be designed for the critical
section at ground and first floor level using BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10). The concrete is C30 / 37.
The wall is supported on pad foundations and the ground floor is ground bearing.

Figure 6.1
Typical floor plan

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 2 of 15

Figure 6.2
Section X–X
The example is intended to show how a shear wall providing part of the lateral stability in
one direction in a medium rise structure might be designed by hand.
Axial loads and first order moments are determined. The designs consider slenderness in
order to determine design moments, MEd in the plane perpendicular to the wall. The effects
of allowing for imperfections are also illustrated.
6.2.1 Actions
kN / m2
gk qk
Roof
Paving 40 mm 1.00 <Section 2.3.2>
Waterproofing 0.50
Insulation 0.10
Suspended ceiling 0.15
Services 0.30
Self-weight 200 mm slab 5.00
7.05
Variable action 0.60
Floor slabs
Carpet 0.03
Raised floor 0.30
Suspended ceiling 0.15
Services 0.30
Self-weight 200 mm slab 5.00
5.78
Variable action 2.50
Ground floor slab (ground bearing)
Carpet 0.03
Raised floor 0.30
Services 0.15
Self-weight 200 mm slab 5.00
5.48
Variable action 2.50

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 3 of 15

 Stairs
150 waist @ 30 4.40
Treads 0.15 × 0.25 × 25 × 4 / 2 = 1.88
Screed 0.05 × 22 = 1.10
Plaster 0.21
Tiles and bedding 1.00
8.59
Variable 2.50
Cavity wall
102 mm brickwork 2.37
50 mm insulation 0.02
100 mm blockwork 1.40
Plaster 0.21
4.00
RC wall
200 mm wall 5.00
Plaster both sides 0.42
5.42

Wind Wk = 1.10 <BS EN 1991–1–4 & NA>

6.2.2 Load take down

Consider whole wall
Gk Qk
@ level Σ @ level Σ
Roof (6.0 / 2 + 2.5 / 2) × (4.4 + 1.5 / 2) × (7.05 + 0.6) = 154.3 13.1
Roof (6.0 / 2) × (1.3 / 2) × (7.05 + 0.6) = 13.7 1.2
Wall 3.3 × 4.4 × 5.42 = 78.7
246.7 14.3
@ above 3rd floor 246.7 14.3
rd
3 (6.0 / 2) × (1.3 / 2 + 4.4 + 1.5 / 2) × (5.78 + 2.5) = 100.6 43.5
floor
Landing (2.5 / 2 × 1.5 / 2) × (5.78 + 2.5) 11.6 5.0
Wall a. b. 78.7
Stair say 1.1 × 4.4 (8.59 + 2.5) 41.6 12.1
232.5 60.6
@ above 2nd floor 479.2 74.9
2nd floor, landing, wall and stair a. b. 232.5 60.6
@ above 1st floor 711.7 135.5
1st floor, landing, wall and stair a. b. 232.5 60.6
@ above ground floor 944.2 196.1
Ground floor assume 1 m all round =
2 × (1.3 / 2 + 4.40 + 1.5 / 2) × (5.48 + 2.5) = 63.6 29.0
250 mm wall to foundation 4.4 × 0.2 × 0.6 × 25 = 13.2
76.8 29.0
@ above foundation 1021.0 225.1

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 4 of 15

6.2.3 Design actions due to vertical load at ground – 1st
Gk = 944.2 Gk /m = 944.2 / 4.4 = 214.6 kN / m

Qk = αn × 196.1
where
αn = 1.1 – n / 10
where
n =no. of storeys qualifying for reduction* <BS EN 1991-1-1 6.3.1.2(11) & NA>
=3
= 1.1 – 3 / 10 = 0.8
∴Qk = 0.8 × 196.1 = 156.9 kN Qk /m = 156.9 / 4.4 = 35.7 kN /m

6.2.4 Vertical loads from wind action: moments in plane

Consider wind loads, N–S

Figure 6.3 Lateral stability against wind loads N–S

Check relative stiffness of lift shaft and wall A to determine share of load on wall A.
Lift shaft: ILS = 2.44 / 12 – 2.04 / 12 – 0.2 × 1.63 / 12
= 1.36 m4
Wall A: IWallA = 0.2 × 4.43 / 12
= 1.41 m4
∴ Wall A takes = 1.41 / (1.41 + 1.36) = 51% of wind load.
Check shear centre to resolve the effects of torsion.
Determine centre of reaction of lift shaft
Area x Ax
2.4 × 2.4 = 5.76 1.2 6.912
–2.0 × 2.0 = –4.00 1.2 –4.800
–1.6 × 0.2 = –0.32 2.3 –0.732
1.44 1.38

*
Includes storeys supporting Categories A (residential & domestic), B (office), C (areas of
congregation) and D (shopping) but excludes E (storage and industrial), F (traffic), G (traffic) and H
(roofs).

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 5 of 15

 x

Figure 6.4 Lift shaft

x = Ax / A = 1.38 / 1.44 = 0.956 m
i.e. from face of lift shaft to CoG of shaft
= 2.40 – 0.956 = 1.444 m

Shear centre, Cw of walls, from centreline of wall A

ILS × (1.44 + 24.00 + 0.05†) 1.36 × 25.49
= = = 12.56 m from wall A
ILS + IWallA 1.36 + 1.41

or = 12.56 + 2.80 – 0.05 = 15.31 from east end of building

Figure 6.5 Shear centres

Note: centre of action and shear centre (almost) coincide. ∴ There is no torsion to resolve in the stability
system for wind in a N–S direction. (Had there been significant torsion this would have been resolved into
+/– forces in a couple based on the shear walls.)

†
Assuming centreline of wall A is 50 mm to right hand side of grid.

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 6 of 15

 ∴ Wall A takes 51% of wind load
so characteristic wind load on wall A,
Wk = 51% × wk × Lx = 51% × 1.1 × 30.7 = 17.2 kN / m

∴ at just above ground floor, characteristic in-

plane moment in wall A, Mk
= 17.2 × 1412 / 2 = 1709.8 kNm

Resolving into couple using 1 m either end of wall‡,

characteristic wind load in each end, Wk
= 1709.8 / 3.4 = ± 502.9 kN

Figure 6.6 Wall A – wind loads N–S

6.2.5 Effects of global imperfections in plane of wall A

Figure 6.7 Global imperfections

‡
For medium rise shear walls there are a number of methods of design. Cl. 9.6.1 suggests strut-and-
tie (see Section xx). Another method [ref to Concrete Buildings Design manual] is to determine elastic
tensile and compression stresses from NEd/bL +/– 6MEd/bL2 and determine reinforcement
requirements based on those maxima. The method used here assumes a couple, consisting of 1.0 m of
wall either end of the wall. The reinforcement in tension is assumed to act at the centre of one end and
the concrete in compression (with a rectangular stress distribution) acts at the centre of the other
end. The forces generated by the couple add or subtract from the axial load in the 1 m ends of the
walls. The method is useful for typical straight shear walls of say 2.5 to 5.0 m in length.

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 7 of 15

Global imperfections can be represented by forces Hi at floor level where
Hi = θi(Nb – Na) <Exp. (5.4)>
where
θi = (1 / 200)αhαm <5.2(1),
5.2(5), 5.2(8)
where
& NA>
αh = 0.67 ≤ 2 / l0.5 ≤ 1.0
= 0.67 ≤ 2 / 14.70.5 ≤ 1.0
= 0.67 ≤ 0.52 ≤ 1.0
= 0.67
αm = [0.5(1 + 1 / m)]0.5
where
m = no. of members contributing to the total effect
= 25 vertical elements on 4 floors
= 100
αm = 0.71
∴ θi = 0.67 × 0.71 / 200
= 0.0024
Nb, Na = axial forces in members below and above
(Nb – Na) = axial load from each level
At roof level
Area = 30.4 × 14.5 – 1.3 × 2.5 – 3.6 × 4.8 = 420.3 m3
Perimeter = 2 × (30.4 + 14.5) = 89.8 m
(Na – Nb) = axial load from roof level
= 420.3 × (7.05 + 0.6) + 89.8 × 0.9 × 4.0 = 3286.4 + 252.2 kN
At 3rd floor
(Na – Nb) = 420.3 × (5.78 + 2.5) + 89.8 × 3.3 × 4.0 = 3615.7 + 1050.8 kN
At 2nd floor
(Na – Nb) = 3615.7 + 1050.8 kN
At 1st floor
(Na – Nb) = 3615.7 + 1050.8 kN

HiR = 0.0024 × (3286.4 + 252.2) = 7.9 + 0.6 = 8.5 kN

Hi3 = Hi2 = Hi1 = 0.0024 × (3615.7 + 1050.8) = 8.7 + 2.5 = 11.2 kN
Characteristic design moment at ground floor
Mk = 8.5 × 13.2 + 11.2 × (9.90 + 6.60 + 3.30)
= 112.2 + 221.8 = 334.0 kNm
As before, wall A resists 51% of this moment. Resolving into couple using 1 m either end of wall,
∴ GkH§ = 0.51 × 334.0 / 3.4 = ± 50.1 kN
i.e. GkH = ± 50.1 kN / m

§
As Hi derives mainly from permanent actions its resulting effects are considered as being a
permanent action too.

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 8 of 15

6.2.6 Design moments – perpendicular to plane of wall

Figure 6.8 Plan of wall A and location of sections Figure 6.9 Section A – A
A – A and B – B
Section A – A @ 1st floor.
The slab frames into the wall. For the purposes of assessing fixed end moments, the width of slab
contributing to the moments in the wall is assumed to be the length of the wall plus distances half
way to adjacent supports either end. Therefore, consider the fixed end moment for 1.50/2 + 4.40 +
1.30/ 2 = 5.8 m width of adjoining slab framing into the 4.4 m long shear wall (see Figure 6.8).

Figure 6.10 Subframe section A – A @ 1st floor

FEM ** Assuming variable action is a leading action: <BS EN 1990 Exp.

= nl2/8 (6.10) & NA>
= 5.8 (1.35 × 5.78 + 1.5 × 2.5) × 6.02 / 8
= 5.8 × 11.6 × 62 / 8 = 302.8 kNm
kw = EI / l = E × 4400 × 2003 / (12 × 3300)
= E × 8.88 × 105

**
FEM Fixed End Moment for 1 m width of adjoining slab.

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 9 of 15

ks = EI / 2l = E × 5800 × 2003 / (2 × 12 × 6000)
= E × 3.22 × 105
M = 302.8 × 8.88 / (2 × 8.8 + 3.22)
= 302.8 × 0.42 = 121.2 kNm
i.e. 121.2 / 4.40 = 27.5 kNm / m @ ULS
Similarly, assuming variable action is an accompanying action:
M = 5.8 (1.35 × 5.78 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 2.5) × 62 / 8
= 5.8 × 10.4 × 62 / 8 = 271.4 kNm
271.4 × 0.42 / 4.40 = 25.9 kNm / m @ ULS

Section A – A @ ground floor. By inspection not critical – nominal moment.

Section B – B @ 1st. Consider the landing influences half of wall (2.2 m long) and that this section of
wall is subject to supporting half the slab considered before at 1st floor level at Section A–A.

Figure 6.11 Section B – B

FEM
Assuming variable action is a leading action:
= 302.8 / 2 = 151.4 kNm
kw =I/l
= 2200 × 2003 / (12 × 1650) = 8.88 × 105

ks = 3.22 × 105 / 2 = 1.61 × 105

M = 151.4 × 8.88 / (2 × 8.88 + 1.61)
= 151.4 × 0.46
= 69.6 kNm
i.e. 63.8 / 2.2 = 31.6 kNm / m @ ULS
Similarly, assuming variable action is an accompanying action:
M = 5.8 (1.35 × 5.78 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 2.5) × 62 / 8
= 5.8 × 10.4 × 62 / 8 = 271.4 kNm
271.4 × 0.46 / (2 × 2.2) = 28.4 kNm / m @ ULS

Section B – B at landing level and ground floor. By inspection not critical.

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 10 of 15

6.2.7 Consider slenderness of wall at ground floor (max.)††
Effective length, l0 = 0.75 × (3300 – 200) = 2325 <Concise Table 5.1>
λ = 3.46 × l0 / h = 3.46 × 2325 / 200 = 40.2 <5.8.3.2(1)>
Limiting slenderness, λlim = 20 ABC / n0.5 <5.8.3.1(1),
where Exp. (5.13N)>
A = 0.7
B = 1.1
C = 1.7 – rm
where
rm = M01 / M02
= say = –0.25
= 1.95
n = NEd / Acfd
where
NEd = 214.6 × 1.25 + 31.2 × 1.5 × 0.7 + 502.9 × 1.5 + 98.2 × 1.5 × 0.7 ‡‡
= 268.3 + 32.8 + 754.4 + 103.1
= 1158.6 kN
Acfd = 200 × 1000 × 0.85 × 30 / 1.5 = 3400 kN
∴ n = 0.34
∴ λlim = 20 × 0.7 × 1.1 × 1.95 / 0.340.5 = 51.5
∴ As λ < λlim wall is not slender and ∴ no secondary moments

6.2.8 Summary: design forces on wall, ground – 1st floor

At ground to 1st consider maxima.
Vertical loads Gk = 214.6 kN / m
Qk = 35.7 kN / m
Vertical load due to in-plane bending and wind
Wk = ± 502.9 kN / m
Vertical load due to in-plane bending and imperfections
GkH = ± 50.1 kN / m
Maximum moment out of plane, floor imposed load as leading action
M = 31.6 kN / m @ ULS
Maximum moment out of plane, floor imposed load as accompanying action
M = 28.4 kN / m @ ULS

6.2.9 Combinations of actions at ground – 1st floor

a) At ULS, for maximum axial load, Wk is leading variable action.
NEd = 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk1 + 1.5ψ0Qki
= 1.35 (214.6 + 50.1) + 1.5 × 502.9 + 1.5 × 0.7 × 35.7
= 357.3 + 754.4 + 37.5
= 1149.2 kN / m
MEd = M + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd <5.8.8.2(1)
where 6.1.4>
M = moment from 1st order analysis
= 28.4 kNm / m
ei = l0 / 400 = 2325 / 400 = 5.8 mm <5.2(7), 5.2(9)>
e0 = h / 30 ≥ 20 mm = 20 mm <6.1.4>
MEd = 28.4 + 0.0058 × 1149.2.1 ≥ 0.020 × 1149.2
= 28.4 + 6.7 ≥ 23.0 = 35.1 kNm/m …

††
Ignoring effect of landing.
‡‡
Assuming wind load is lead variable action.

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 11 of 15

 b) At ULS, for minimum axial load, Wk is leading variable action.
NEd = 1.0 × 214.6 – 1.35 × 50.1 – 1.5 × 502.9 + 0 × 35.7
= –607.4 kN / m (tension)
MEd = 28.4§§ + 0.0058 × 607.4 ≥ 0.020 × 602.4
= 28.4 + 3.5 ≥ 23.0
= 31.9 kNm / m
c) At ULS, for maximum out of plane bending assuming Qk is leading variable action.
NEd = 1.35 (214.6 + 50.1) + 1.5 × 35.7 + 1.5 × 0.5 × 502.9
= 357.3 + 53.6 + 377.2
= 788.1 kN / m
MEd = 31.6 + 0.0058 × 788.1 ≥ 0.020 × 788.1
= 31.6 + 4.6 ≥ 15.8
= 36.2 kNm / m
or NEd = 1.0 × 214.6 – 1.35 × 50.1 – 0 × 31.2 – 1.5 × 0.5 × 502.9
= 214.6 – 67.6 – 0 – 377.2
= –230.2 kN / m (tension)
MEd = 31.6 + 0.0058 × 230.2
= 33.0 kNm / m
Consolidate c) into a) and b) to consider two load cases:
NEd = 1149.4 kN / m,
MEd = 36.2 kN / m (out of plane)
and NEd = –607.4 kN / m,
MEd = 36.2 kN / m (out of plane)

6.2.10 Design: for cover

cnom = cmin + Δcdev
where
cmin = max[cmin,b ; cmin,dur]] <Exp. (4.1)>
where
cmin,b = diameter of bar = 20 mm vertical or 10 mm lacers
cmin,dur = for XC1 = 15 mm
Δcdev = 10 mm
cnom = 15 + 10 = 25 mm to lacers
(35 mm to vertical bars)

6.2.11 Fire resistance

Assuming 1 hour fire resistance required for, as a worst case, μfi = 0.7
and fire on both sides.
Min. thickness = 140 mm, min. axis distance = 10 mm i.e. not critical <BS EN 1992–1–2:
Table 5.4>

6.2.12 Design using charts

For compressive load:
d2 / h = (25 + 10 + 16 / 2) / 200 = 0.215
∴ interpolate between charts 15.5d and 15.5e for <Concise EC2 Figs
15.5d, 15.5e>
NEd / bhfck = 1149.4 × 103 / (200 × 1000 × 30) = 0.192
MEd / bh2fck = 36.2 × 106 / (2002 × 1000 × 30) = 0.030

§§
Strictly incompatible with Qk = 0. However, allow Qk= 0.

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 12 of 15

 Gives:
Asfyk / bhfck = 0 ∴ minimum area of reinforcement required
= 0.002 Ac <9.6.2 & NA>
= 0.002 × 200 × 1000
= 400 mm2 / m
= 200 mm2 / m each face
max. 400 mm cc, min. 12 mm diameter <9.6.2(3),SMDSC>
Try T12 @ 400

Figure 6.12 Stresses and strains in wall subject to tension and out of plane moment

For tensile load and moment:

Working from first principles, referring to Figure 6.12 and ignoring contribution from concrete in tension
NEd = (σst1 + σst2) × As / 2
and MEd = (σst1 – σst2) × As / 2 × (d – d2)
so σst1 + σst2 = 2NEd / As
and σst1 – σst2 = 2MEd / [(d – d2)As]
∴ 2σst1 = 2NEd / As + 2MEd / [(d – d2)As]
∴ A s = (NEd / σst1) + MEd / (d – d2)σst1
σst1 = fyk / γm = 500 / 1.15 = 434.8
∴ As = 607.4 × 103 / 434.8 + 36.2 × 106 / [(157 – 43) × 434.8]
= 1397 + 730
= 2127 mm2
σst2 = 2NEd / As – σst1 = 571.7 – 434.8 = 136 MPa
By inspection all concrete is in tension zone and may be ignored.
Use 6 no. H16 @ 200 cc both sides for at least 1 m each end of wall (2412 mm2)

6.2.13 Horizontal reinforcement

As, hmin = 0.001As or 25% As vert <9.6.3(1) & NA>
= 200 mm2 or 0.25 × 2036 = 509 mm2 / m
∴ requires 254 mm2 / m each side
Spacing ≤ 400 mm <9.6.3(2)>
Links not required <9.6.4(1)>
Use H10 @ 300 (262 mm2 / m) both sides.

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 13 of 15

6.2.14 Check for tension at top of foundation
Permanent and variable (see Section6.2.2) <Section 6.2.2>
Gk = 1021.0 / 4.4 = 232.0 kN / m
Qk = 225.1 / 4.4 = 51.2 kN / m
Wind <Section 6.2.4>
Mk = 17.2 × 14.1 × [14.1 / 2 + 0.6] = 1855.3 kN / m
Resolved into couple 1 m either end of wall
Wkw = 1855.3 / 3.4 = +/- 545.7 kN / m
Global imperfections(see Section 6.2.5) <Section 6.2.5>
Mk = 8.5 × 13.8 + 11.2 × (10.5 + 7.2 + 3.9 + 0.6)
= 365.9 kNm
GkH = 365.9 × 0.51 / 3.4 = 54.9 kN / m
At ULS for maximum axial tension Wk is lead variable action:
NEd = 1.0 × 232.0 – 1.35 × 54.9 – 1.5 × 545.7 + 0 × 51.2
= –660.7 kN / m
MEd = nominal = e2NEd = 0.02 × 660.7 <6.1.4>
= 13.2 kNm / m
As before
NEd MEd
As = +
fyk / γm (d – d2)fyk / γm
= 660.7 × 103 / 434.8 + 13.2 × 106 / [(157 – 43) × 434.8]
= 1520 + 266
= 1786 mm2 i.e. not critical
∴ Use 6 no. H16 @ 200 cc b.s. for at least 1 m either end of wall.

6.2.15 Check stability

Assume base extends 0.3 m beyond either end of wall A, i.e. is 5.0 m long
and is 1.2 m wide by 0.9 m deep
Overturning moments <BS EN 1990 Table
A1.2(A) & NA>
Wind (see Figure 6.6)
Mk = 0.51 x 17.2 × 14.1 × [14.1 / 2 + 1.5] = 1057.5
Global imperfections (see Figure 6.7)
Mk = 0.51 x [8.5 × 14.7 + 11.2 × (11.4 + 8.1 + 4.8 + 1.5)]
= 0.51 x [125.0 + 11.2 × 25.8]
= 0.51 x 414.0
= 211 kNm

Restoring moment
Mk = (1021.0 + 5.0 x 1.2 x 0.9 x 25 + 0 x 225.1 ) x (0.3 + 2.2)
= 2890 kNm
At ULS of EQU,
Overturning moment
= fn(γQ,1Qk1 + γG,supGk) <BS EN 1990 Table
= 1.5 x 1057.5 + 1.1 x 211.0 = 1818.4 kNm A1.2(A) & NA>
Restoring moment
= fn(γG,infGk) <BS EN 1990 Table
= 0.9 x 2890 = 2601 kNm i.e. > 1818.4 kNm A1.2(A) & NA>
∴ OK

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 14 of 15

6.2.16 Design summary

Figure 6.13 Wall design summary

WE 6 Walls v7a chg 17 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 15 of 15

 Worked Examples for Eurocode 2

Draft Version

All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate
the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and
application.

No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or
information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or
advisors.

Readers should note that this is a draft version of a document and will be subject to
revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the
latest version.
5 Columns
5.1 General
The calculations in this section illustrate:
5.2 Design of a non-slender column using design charts.
5.3 Design of a perimeter column using iteration of equations to determine reinforcement
requirements.
5.4 Design of an internal column with high axial load.
5.5 Design of a slender column requiring a two hour fire resistance.
In general axial loads and first order moments are assumed to be available. The designs
consider slenderness in order to determine design moments, MEd. The columns are designed
and checked for biaxial bending. The effects of allowing for imperfections are illustrated.
A general method of designing columns is as follows:

1. Determine design life. <BS EN 1990 & NA Table NA

2.1>
2. Assess actions on the column. <BS EN 1991 (10 parts) & UK
NAs>
3. Determine which combinations of actions apply. <BS EN 1990 & NA Tables NA
A1.1 & NA A1.2(B)>
4. Assess durability requirements and determine <BS 8500–1>
concrete strength.
5. Check cover requirements for appropriate fire <Approved Document B
resistance period. BS EN 1992–1–2>
6. Determine cover for fire, durability and bond. <BS EN 1992–1–1 Cl. 4.4.1>
7. Analyse structure for critical combination moments <BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 5>
and axial forces.
8. Check slenderness and determine design moments. <BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 5.8>
9. Determine area of reinforcement required. <BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 6.1>
10. Check spacing of bars and links. <BS EN 1992–1–1 Sections 8 & 9>

5.2 Edge column

The intention of this calculation is to show a typical hand calculation.
A 300 mm square column on the edge of a flat slab structure supports an axial load of 1620 kN
and first order moments of 38.5 kNm top and −38.5 kNm bottom in one direction only. Using
fck = 30 MPa and cnom = 25 mm. The 250 mm thick flat slabs are at 4000 mm vertical centres.

Figure 5.1
Forces in edge column

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 2 of 25

5.2.1 Check slenderness, λ
* <5.8.3.2>
Effective length , l0 = factor × l
where
factor = from Concise EC2 Table 5.1, condition 2 each end <Concise EC2 Table
= 0.85 5.1, PD 6687: 2.10>
l = clear height = 3750 mm
l0 = 0.85 × 3750 = 3187 mm
Slenderness λ = l0 / i <Exp. (5.14)>
where
i = radius of gyration
= h / 120.5 for rectangular sections
λ = 3187 × 3.46 / 300 = 36.8

5.2.2 Limiting slenderness, λlim

λlim = 20 ABC / n0.5 <Exp. (5.13N)>
where
A = 0.7 (default) <5.8.3.1(1)>
B = 1.1 (default) <5.8.3.1(1)>
C = 1.7 − rm = 1.7 − M01/M02 <5.8.3.1(1)>
= 1.7 − 38.5 / (− 38.5) = 2.7
n = NEd / Acfcd = 1620 × 103 / (3002 × 0.85 × 30 / 1.5)
= 0.81
λlim = 20 ABC / n0.5
= 20 × 0.7 × 1.1 × 2.7 / 0.810.5
In this example λlim = 46.2 i.e. > 36.8 ∴ column not slender.

5.2.3 Design moments

MEd = max[M02, M0Ed + M2, M01 + 0.5M2] <5.8.8.2(1)>
where
M02 = M + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd <5.8.8.2
where 6.1.4>
M = 38.5 kNm
ei = l0 / 400 <5.2.7, 5.2.9>
e0 = max[h/30; 20] = max[300/30; 20] = 20 mm <6.1.4>
M02 = 38.5 + 1620 × 3.187 / 400 ≥ 0.02 × 1620
= 38.5 + 12.9 ≥ 32.4 kNm
= 51.4 kNm
M0Ed = (0.6M02 + 0.4M01) ≥ 0.4M02
= 0.6 × 51.4 + 0.4 × (− 38.5 + 12.9) ≥ 0.4 × 51.4
= 20.6 ≥ 20.6
= 20.6
M2 = 0 (column is not slender)
M01 = M02
∴ max[M02, M0Ed + M2, M01 + 0.5M2] = 51.4 kNm ∴ MEd = 51.4 kNm

*
Effective lengths are covered in Eurocode 2 Section 5.8.3.2 and Exp (5.15). The effective length of most columns
will be l/2< l0 < l < Figure 5.7f)>. PD 6686[ref to] Cl 2.10 suggests that using the procedure outlined in
Eurocode 2 and <5.8.3.2(3) 5.8.3.2(5)> leads to similar effective lengths to those tabulated in BS 8110[ref
to] and reproduced in Table 5.1 of Concise EC2. For simplicity tabular values are used in this example. However,
experience suggests that these tabulated values are conservative.

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 3 of 25

5.2.4 Design using charts
d2 = cnom + link + φ / 2 = 25 + 8 + 16 = 49
d2 / h = 49 / 300 = 0.163
∴ interpolating between d2 / h = 0.15 (Figure 15.5c) and 0.20 (Figure 15.5d)
for:- <Concise EC2 Figs
NEd / bhfck = 1620 × 103 / (3002 × 30) = 0.60 15.5c, 15.5d>
2
MEd / bh fck = 51.4 × 106 / (3003 × 30) = 0.063
Asfyk / bhfck = 0.24
As = 0.24 × 3002 × 30 / 500 = 1296 mm2
Try 4 no. H25 (1964 mm2)

5.2.5 Check for biaxial bending

<5.8.9
λy / λz ≈ 1.0
Exp. (5.38a)>
i.e. λy / λz ≤ 2.0 ∴ OK but check Exp. (5.38b)
As a worst case MEDy may coexist with e0NEd about the orthogonal axis: <6.1(4)>
ey / heq (MEdz / NEd) / h 38.5 <Exp. (5.38b)>
= = = 1.19 i.e > 0.2 and <5.0
ez / beq (MEdy / NEd) / b 32.4
∴ biaxial check required <5.8.9(4)>
Check whether
(MEdz / MRdz)a + (MEdy / MRdy)a ≤ 1.0 <Exp. (5.39)>
where
MEdz = 38.5 kNm
MEdy = 32.4 kNm
MRdz = MRdy
To determine MRdz, find MEd / bh2fck (and therefore moment capacity) by
interpolating between d2 / h = 0.15 (Concise EC2 Figure 15.5c) and 0.20
(Concise EC2 Figure 15.5d) for the proposed arrangement and coexistant
axial load
Assuming 4 no. H25,
Asfyk / bhfck = 1964 × 500 / (3002× 30) = 0.36
Interpolating for NEd / bhfck = 0.6, <Concise EC2 Figs
MEd / bh2fck = 0.094 15.5c, 15.5d>
∴ MRdz = MRdy = 0.094 × 3003 × 30 = 76.1 kNm
A is dependent on NEd / NRd
where
NRd = Acfcd + Asfyd
= 3002 × 0.85 × 30 / 1.5 + 1964 × 500 / 1.15
= 1530.0 + 853.9
= 2383.9 kN
NEd / NRd = 1620 / 2383.9 = 0.68

a = 1.48 by interpolating between values given for NEd / NRd= 0.1 ,(1.0) and NEd / <5.8.9(4), Notes to
NRd = 0.7, (1.5) Exp. (5.39)>

(MEdz / MRdz)a + (MEdy / MRdy)a = (38.5 / 76.1)1.48 + (32.4 / 76.1)1.48 <Exp. (5.39)>
= 0.36 + 0.28
= 0.64 ∴ OK.
∴ 4 no. H25 OK.

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 4 of 25

5.2.6 Links
Diameter min. φ / 4 = 25 / 4 = 8 mm <9.5.3 & NA>
Max. spacing = 0.6 × 300 = 180 mm <9.5.3(3)
Links at say 175 mm cc 9.5.3(4)>

5.2.7 Design summary

Figure 5.2
Design summary: edge column

5.3 Perimeter column (internal environment)

This example is intended to show a hand calculation for a non-slender internal column using
iteration (of x) to determine the reinforcement required.
This 300 × 300 mm perimeter column supports three suspended floors and the roof of an
office block. It is to be designed at ground floor level where the storey height is 3.45 m and
the clear height in the N–S direction (z direction) is 3.0 m and 3.325 m in the E–W direction
(y direction). One hour fire resistance is required and fck = 30 MPa.
From first order analysis, load case 1:
NEd = 1129.6 kN; M02yy = 89.6 kNm; M02zz = 0
Load case 2:
NEd = 1072.1 kN; M02yy = 68.7 kNm; M02zz = 6.0 kNm

5.3.1 Cover
cnom = cmin + Δcdev <Exp. (4.1)>
where
cmin = max[cmin,b, cmin,dur]
where
cmin,b = diameter of bar. Assume 32 mm bars and 8 mm links <4.4.1.2(3)>
= 32 mm to main bars, 32 − 8 = 24 mm to links
= say 25 mm
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions. Assume XC1.
cmin,dur = 15 mm
cmin = 25 mm
Δcdev = 10 mm <4.4.1.3(3)>
Therefore cnom = 25 + 10 = 35 mm to links cnom= 35 mm to links

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 5 of 25

 Figure 5.3
Perimeter column (internal environment)

5.3.2 Fire resistance

Check validity of using Method A and Table 5.2a: <BS EN 1992–1–2: 5.3.2,
Table 5.2a>
l0,fi ≈ 0.7 × 3.325 i.e. < 3.0 m ∴ OK. <BS EN 1992–1–2: 5.3.3(3)>
e = M02yy / NEd = 89.6 × 106 / 1129.6 × 103 = 79 mm <BS EN 1992–1–2: 5.3.2 &
emax = 0.15h = 0.15 × 300 = 45 mm ∴ no good. NA>

Check validity of using Method B and Table 5.2b: <BS EN 1992–1–2: 5.3.3>
emax = 0.25b = 75 mm ∴ no good.
Use BS EN 1992–1–2 Annex C Tables C1 – C9. <BS EN 1992–1–2: Annex C>
2 †
Assume min. 4 no. H25 = 1964 mm (≡ 2.2%)
ω = Asfyd / Acfcd = 0.022 × (500 / 1.15) / (0.85 × 30 / 1.5) <BS EN 1992–1–2: 5.3.3(2)>
= 0.56
e ≈ 0.25b and ≤ 100 mm
λ = l0 / i <BS EN 1992–1–2: 5.3.3(2),
where 5.3.3(3)>
l0 = 0.7 × 3.325 = 2327 mm
i = radius of gyration = (I / A)0.5 = h / 120.5
= 300 / 120.5 = 87 mm
λ = 2327 / 87 = 276
n = N0Ed,fi / 0.7(Acfcd + Asfyd) <BS EN 1992–1–2: 5.3.3(2)>
= 0.7 × 1129.6 / 0.7(3002 × 0.85 × 30 / 1.5 + 1964 × 500 / 1.15)
= 1129.6 / 2383.9
= 0.47
∴ interpolate for λ = 30 and n = 0.47 between
Table C5 (ω = 0.5, e = 0.25b) ⇒ bmin = 235, a = 35 mm

†
Using 4 no. H20 gives ω = 0.34, n = 0.54 and bmin = 310 mm ∴ no good!

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 6 of 25

 and
Table C8 (ω = 1.0, e = 0.25b) ⇒ bmin = 185, a = 30 mm
∴ for ω = 0.56: bmin = 228, a = 35 mm
OK to use Method B but use min. 4 no. H25.

5.3.3 Structural design: check slenderness

Effective length, l0
l0 = 0.5l [1 + k1 / (0.45 + k1) ]0.5 [1 + k2 / (0.45 + k2) ]0.5 <Exp. (5.15)>
where
k1, k2 = relative stiffnesses top and bottom
But conservatively, choose to use tabular method‡. For critical direction condition 2 <Concise EC2 Table
at top and condition 3 at bottom (pinned support). 5.1>
l0 = 0.95 × 3325 = 3158 mm
Slenderness ratio, λ <5.8.3.2(1)>
λ = l0 / i
where
i = radius of gyration = (I / A)0.5 = h / 120.5
λ = 3158 × 120.5 / 300 = 36.5 λ = 36.5
Limiting slenderness ratio, λlim <5.8.3.1(1) & NA>
λlim = 20 ABC / n0.5
where
A = 1 / (1 + 0.2φef). Assume 0.7 <5.8.4>
B = (1 + 2 Asfyd / Acfcd)0.5 <5.8.3.1(1)>
= (1 + 2ω)0.5
Assuming min. 4 no. H25 (for fire)
ω = 0.56 as before
B = (1 + 2 × 0.56)0.5 = 1.46
C = 1.7 – rm <5.8.3.1(1)>
where
rm = M01 / M2
Assuming conservatively that M01 = 0
rm = 0
C = 1.7
n = NEd / Acfcd
= 1129.6 × 103 / (3002 × 0.85 × 30 / 1.5)
= 0.74
λlim = 20 × 0.7 × 1.46 × 1.7 / 0.740.5
= 40.4 λlim = 40.4
∴ as λ < λlim column is not slender and 2nd order moments are not required.
Column is not slender

5.3.4 Design moments, MEd

MEd = MOEd + M2 ≥ e0NEd <5.8.8.2(1), 5.8.8.2(3)
= M + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd 6.1.4>
where
M = moment from 1st order analysis
eiNEd = effect of imperfections§

‡
See Section 5.2.1
§
The effects of imperfections need only be taken into account in the most unfavourable direction.
<5.8.9(2)>

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 7 of 25

 where
ei = l0 / 400 <5.2(7), 5.2.9, 5.8.8.2(1)>
e0 = h / 30 > 20 mm <6.1.4>
Load case 1:
MEdy = 89.6 + (3158 / 400) × 1129.6 × 10−3 > 0.02 × 1129.6
= 89.6 + 8.9 > 22.6 = 98.5 kNm
Load case 2:
MEdy = 68.7 kNm
MEdz = 6.0 + (l0 / 400) × 1072.1 × 10−3 > 0.02 × 1072.1
where l0 = 0.9 × 3000 <Concise EC2 Table 5.1>
= 13.2 > 21.4 = 21.4 kNm

5.3.5 Design using iteration of x

For axial load <Concise EC2 Sec.
AsN / 2 = (NEd – αccηfckbdc / γC) / (σsc – σst) 6.2.2, Appendix A3>
For moment
AsM / 2 = [MEd – αccηfckbdc(h / 2 – dc / 2) /γC] <Concise EC2 Sec.
(h / 2 – d2) (σsc + σst) 6.2.2, Appendix A3>
where
MEd = 98.5 × 106
NEd = 1129.6 × 103
αcc = 0.85 <3.1.6(1) & NA>
η = 1.0 for fck ≤ 50 MPa <Exp. (3.21)>
fck = 30
b = 300
h = 300
dc = depth of compression zone
= λx <Exp. (3.19)>
= 0.8x < h
where
x = depth to neutral axis
d2 = 35 + 8 + 25 / 2 = 55 mm assuming H25
γC = 1.5 <Table 2.1N>
σsc, (σst) = stress in reinforcement in compression (tension)

Figure 5.4
Section in axial compression and bending <Fig. 6.1>

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 8 of 25

 Try x = 200 mm.
εcu = εcu2 = 0.0035
0.0035 × (x – d2) 0.0035 × (200 – 55)
εsc = =
x 200
= 0.0025
σsc = 0.0025 × 200000 ≤ fyk / γS
= 500 ≤ 500 / 1.15
= 434.8 MPa
εst = 0.0035(h – x – d2) / x = 0.0035(300 – 200 – 55) / 200
= 0.0008
σst = 0.0008 × 200000 ≤ 500 / 1.15
= 160 MPa
1129.6 × 103 – 0.85 × 1.0 × 30 × 300 × 200 × 0.8 / (1.5 × 103)
AsN / 2 =
434.8 – 160
(1129.6 – 816.0) × 103
= = 1141 mm2
274.8
98.5 × 106 – 0.85 × 1.0 × 30 × 300 × 200 × 0.8 (300 / 2 – 200 × 0.8 / 2) / (1.5 × 103)
AsM / 2 =
(300 / 2 – 55) (434.8 + 160)
(98.5 – 57.1) × 106
= = 733 mm2
95 × 594.8
Similarly for x = 210 mm
εcu = 0.0035
εsc = 0.0026; ∴ σsc = 434.8
εst = 0.0006; ∴ σst = 120 MPa
(1129.6 – 856.8) × 103
AsN / 2 = = 866 mm2
434.8 – 120
(98.5 – 56.5) × 106
AsM / 2 = = 796 mm2
95 × 554.8
Similarly for x = 212 mm
σsc = 434.8
εst = 0.00054; ∴σst = 109.MPa
(1129.6 – 865.0) × 103
AsN / 2 = = 812 mm2
434.8 – 109
(98.5 – 56.3) × 106
AsM / 2 = = 816 mm2
95 × 543.8
∴ as AsN/2 ≈ AsM/2,, x = 212 mm is approximately correct and AsN ≈ AsM, ≈ 1628 mm2

∴ Try 4 no. H25 (1964 mm2).

5.3.6 Check for biaxial bending

By inspection,, not critical. <5.8.9(3)>
[Proof: Section is symmetrical and MRdz > 98.5 kNm.
Assuming ey / ez > 0.2 and biaxial bending is critical, and assuming
exponent a = 1 as a worst case for load case 2:
(MEdz/MRdz)a + (MEdy/MRdy)a = (21.4/98.5)1 + (68.7/98.5)1 <Exp. (5.39)>
= 0.91 i.e. < 1.0 ∴ OK.]

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 9 of 25

5.3.7 Links
Minimum size links = 25 / 4 = 6.25, say 8 mm
Spacing: minimum of
a) 0.6 × 20 × 25 = 300 mm <9.5.3(3), 9.5.3(4)>
b) 0.6 × 300 = 180 mm
c) 0.6 × 400 = 240 mm
Use H8 @ 175 mm centres

5.3.8 Design summary

Figure 5.5
Design summary: perimeter column

5.4 Internal column

The flat slab shown in Example 3.5 (reproduced as Figure 5.6) is part of an eight-storey
structure above ground with a basement below ground. The problem is to design column C2
between ground floor and 1st floor. The design forces need to be determined. This will
include the judgement of whether to use Exp. (6.10) or the worse case of Exp. (6.10a) and
Exp. (6.10b) for the design of this column.

The suspended slabs (including the ground floor slab) are 300 mm thick flat slabs at 4500
mm vertical centres. Between ground and 5th floors the columns at C2 are 500 mm square;
above 5th floor they are 465 mm circular. Assume an internal environment, 1 hour fire
resistance and fck = 50 MPa.

Figure 5.6 Part plan of flat slab

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 10 of 25

5.4.1 Design forces
In order to determine design forces for this column it is first necessary to determine vertical loads
and 1st order moments.

5.4.2 Load take-down

Actions:
Roof: gk = 8.5, qk = 0.6 <BS EN 1991-1-1 6.3.4,
NA & Table NA.7>
Floors: gk = 8.5, qk = 4.0 <Sec. 3.4>
In keeping with Section 3.5 use coefficients to determine loads in take down. <Sec. 3.4>
Consider spans adjacent to column C2: <Concise EC2 EC2 Table
Along grid C to be 9.6 m and 8.6 m and internal of 2-span 15.3>
elastic reaction factor = 0.63 + 0.63 = 1.26
Along grid 2 to be 6.0 m and 6.2 m and internal
elastic reaction factor = 0.5 + 0.5 = 1.00

Load take-down for column C2.

Gk Qk
@ level Σ @ level Σ
Roof [1.0 × (6.0 + 6.2) / 2 ] × [1.26 × (9.6 + 8.6) / 2 ] × (8.5 + 0.6) =
= 69.9 × (8.5 + 0.6) = 594.5 42.0
Col 8 – R π ( 0.465 / 2) 2 × (4.5 − 0.3) × 25 17.9 612.4 42.0
8th 1.0 × (6.0 + 6.2) / 2 × 1.26 × (9.6 + 8.6) / 2 × (8.5 + 4.0) = 594.5 279.7
Col 7 – 8 As before 17.9 1224.8 321.7
7th a.b. 594.5 279.7
Col 6 – 7 a.b. 17.9 1837.2 601.4
6th a.b. 594.5 279.7
Col 5 – 6 a.b. 17.9 2449.6 881.1
5th a.b. 594.5 279.7
Col 4 – 5 0.5 × 0.5 × (4.5 − 0.3) × 25 26.3 3070.4 1160.8
4th a.b. 594.5 279.7
Col 3 – 4 a.b. 26.3 3691.2 1440.5
3rd a.b. 594.5 279.7
Col 2 – 3 a.b. 26.3 4312.0 1720.2
2nd a.b. 594.5 279.7
Col 1 – 2 a.b. 26.3 4932.8 1999.7
1st a.b. 594.5 279.8
Col G – 1 a.b. 26.3 5553.6 2279.5
At above ground floor – 5553.6 – 2279.5

5.4.3 Design axial load, ground – 1st floor, NEd

Axial load to Exp. (6.10) <BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10) & NA>
NEd = γGGk + γQQk1 + ψ0γQQki
where
γG = 1.35
γQ = 1.50 <Table 2.5, BS EN 1990:
ψ0,1 = 0.7 (offices) A1.2.2 & NA>
Qk1 = leading variable action (subject to reduction factor αA or αn) <BS EN 1991-1-1, 6.3.1.2
Qki = accompanying action (subject to αA or αn) (10), 6.3.1.2 (11), & NA>
where
αA = 1 – A / 1000 ≥ 0.75

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 11 of 25

 = 1 – 9 × 69.9 / 1000 = 0.37 ≥ 0.75
= 0.75
αn = 1.1 – n / 10 for 1 ≤ n ≤ 5
= 0.6 for 5 ≤ n ≤ 10 and
= 0.5 for n > 10
where
n = number of storeys supported
**
αn = 0.6 for 8 storeys supported
∴ as αn < αA, use αn = 0.6
Assuming the variable action of the roof is an independent variable action:
NEd = 1.35 × 5553.6 + 1.5 × (2279.5 − 42.0) × 0.6 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 42.0
= 1.35 × 5553.6 + 1.5 × 2237.5 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 42.0
= 7497.4 + 2013.8 + 44.1
= 9555.3 kN
To Exp. (6.10), NEd= 9555.3 kN
Axial load to Exp. (6.10a)
NEd = γGGk + ψ0,1γQQk1 + ψ0,1γQQki <BS EN 1990 Exp.
(6.10a) & NA>
= 1.35 × 5553.6 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 0.6 ( 279.8 + 1999.7)
= 7497.4 + 1436.1
= 8933.4 kN
To Exp. (6.10a), NEd= 8933.4 kN

Axial load to Exp. (6.10b) <BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10) & NA>
NEd = ξγGGk + γQQk1 + ψ0,1γQQki
assuming the variable action of the roof is an independent variable action:
= 0.925 × 1.35 × 5553.6 + 1.5 × (2279.5 − 42.0) × 0.6 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 42.0
= 1.25 × 5553.6 + 1.5 × 2237.5 × 0.6 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 42.0
= 6942.1 + 2013.8+ 44.1
= 9000.0 kN
To Exp. (6.10b), NEd= 9000.0 kN

5.4.4 First order design moments, M

Consider grid C to determine Myy in column

Modified
diagram
3 2 1 required

Figure 5.7
Subframe on column C2 along grid C

**
According to BS EN 1991–1–1 6.3.1.2(11) the imposed load on the roof is category H and therefore
does not qualify for reduction factor αn.

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 12 of 25

Actions:
gk = (6.0 + 6.2) / 2 × 8.5 = 51.9 kN / m
qk = (6.0 + 6.2) / 2 × 8.5 = 24.4 kN / m
Relative stiffness of lower column:
Assuming remote ends of slabs are pinned, relative stiffness
blcdlc3/Llc
=
blcdlc /Llc + bucduc /Luc + 0.75 b23d233/L23 + 0.75 b 21 d 21 3/L 21
3 3

where
b = breadth d = depth L = length
lc = lower column uc = upper column

23 = beam 23 21 = beam 21

0.54 / 4.5
=
2 × 0.5 / 4.5 + 0.75 × 6.1 × 0.33 / 8.6 + 0.75 × 6.1 × 0.33 / 9.6
4

= 0.0139 / (0.0278 + 0.0144 + 0.0129) = 0.252

1st order moment using Exp. (6.10)
FEM 23†† = 1.35 × 51.9 × 8.62 / 12 = 431.8 kNm
FEM 21 = (1.35 × 51.9 + 1.5 × 24.4) × 9.62 / 12
= 106.7 × 9.62 / 12 = 819.5 kNm
Mlower,yy = 0.252 × [819.5 – 431.8] = 97.7 kNm
1st order moment using Exp. (6.10a)
FEM 23 = 1.25 × 51.9 × 8.62 / 12 = 399.8 kNm
FEM 21 = (1.25 × 51.9 + 1.5 × 24.4) × 9.62 / 12
= 101.5 × 9.62 / 12 = 779.5 kNm
Mlower,yy = 0.252 × (779.5 – 399.8) = 95.7 kNm
1st order moment using Exp (6.10b)
FEM 23 = 1.35 × 51.9 × 8.62 / 12 = 431.8 kNm
FEM 21 = (1.35 × 51.9 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 24.4 ) × 9.62 / 12
= 95.7 × 9.62 / 12 = 735.0 kNm
Mlower,yy = 0.252 × (735.0 – 431.8) = 76.4 kNm
∴ Exp. (6.10a) critical
Consider grid 2 to determine Mzz in column.

Modified
diagram
required
B C D

6200

Figure 5.8
Subframe on column C2 along grid 2

††
FEM 23 = Fixed end moment in span 23 at 2

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 13 of 25

 Actions:
gk = 0.63 × (8.6 + 9.6) × 8.5
= 11.47 × 8.5 = 97.5 kN/m
qk = 11.47 × 4.0 = 45.9 kN/m
Relative stiffness of lower column:
Assuming remote ends of slabs are fixed, relative stiffness
0.54 / 4.5
=
2 × 0.5 / 4.5 + 11.47 × 0.33 / 6.2 +11.47 × 0.33 / 6.0
4

= 0.0139 / (0.0278 + 0.0500 + 0.0516) = 0.107

1st order moment using Exp. (6.10)
FEM CB = (1.35 × 97.5 + 1.5 × 45.9) × 6.22 / 12
= 200.5 × 6.22 / 12 = 642.3 kNm
FEM CD = 1.35 × 97.5 × 6.02 / 12 = 394.9 kNm
Mlower,zz = 0.107 × (642.3 – 394.9) = 26.5 kNm

1st order moment using Exp. (6.10a)

FEM CB = 1.25 × 97.5 × 6.02 / 12 = 365.6 kNm
FEM CD = (1.25 × 97.5 + 1.5 × 45.9) × 6.22 / 12
= 190.7 × 6.22 / 12 = 611.0 kNm
Mlower,zz = 0.107 × (611.0 – 365.6) = 26.3 kNm
1st order moment using Exp. (6.10b)
FEM CB = (1.35 × 97.5 + 0.7 × 1.5 × 45.9) × 6.22 / 12
= 190.7 × 6.22 / 12 = 576.0 kNm
FEM CD = 1.35 × 97.5 × 6.02 / 12 = 394.9 kNm
Mlower,zz = 0.107 × (576.0 – 394.9) = 19.4 kNm
∴ Exp. (6.10a) critical again.

5.4.5 Summary of design forces in column C2 ground – 1st

Design forces.
Method NEd Myy Mzz
Using Exp. (6.10) 9555.3 kN 97.7 kNm 26.5 kNm
Using Exp. (6.10a) 8933.4 kN 95.7 kNm 26.3 kNm
Using Exp. (6.10b) 9000.0 kN 76.4 kNm 19.4 kNm
Note: To determine maximum 1st order moments in the column, maximum out-of-balance moments
have been determined using variable actions to one side of the column only. The effect on axial load
has, conservatively, been ignored.
It may be argued that using coefficients for the design of the slab and reactions to the columns does
not warrant the sophistication of using Exp. (6.10a) and Exp. (6.10b). Nevertheless, there would
appear to be some economy in designing the column to Exp. (6.10a) or Exp. (6.10b) rather than Exp.
(6.10). The use of Exp. (6.10a) or Exp. (6.10b) is perfectly valid and will be followed here.
However, to avoid duplicate designs for both Exp. (6.10a) and Exp. (6.10b), a worse case of their
design forces will be used, thus: NEd = 9000 kN, Myy = 95.7 kNm, Mzz = 26.3 kNm

5.4.6 Design: cover

cnom = cmin + Δcdev <Exp. (4.1)>
where
cmin = max[cmin,b , cmin,dur]
where

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 14 of 25

 cmin,b = diameter of bar. Assume 32 mm bars and 8 mm links <4.4.1.2(3)>
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions. Assume XC1.
cmin,dur = 15 mm <BS 8500–1 Table
A4>
cmin = 32 mm to main bars, − 8 link
= 24 mm, say 25 mm to link
Δcdev = 10 mm <4.4.1.3 & NA>
∴ cnom = 25 + 10 = 35 mm

5.4.7 Design: fire resistance

Check validity of using Method A and Table 5.2a <BS EN 1992–1–2
5.3.2, Table 5.2a>
a) Check l0,fi ≤ 3.0 m
where
l0 = effective length of column in fire
= 0.5 × clear height
= 0.5 × (4500 – 300)
= 2100 mm OK.
b) Check e ≤ emax = 0.15h = 0.15 × 500 = 75 mm
e = M0Ed,fi / N0Ed,fi
= M0 / NEd
= 99.5 × 106 / 8933 × 103 = 11 mm OK.
c) Check amount of reinforcement ≤ 4% OK.
Assuming μfi = 0.7
bmin = 350 with <BS EN 1992–1–2
ami n = 40 mm OK. Table 5.2a>
For fire using Method A and Table 5.2a is valid

5.4.8 Structural design: check slenderness

Effective length, l0
l0 = 0.5l [1 + k1 / (0.45 + k1)]0.5 [1 + k2 / (0.45 + k2)]0.5 <Exp. (5.15)>
where
k1 and k2 are relative stiffnesses top and bottom of the column as before
(See Section 5.4.4)
Critical direction is where k1 and k2 are greater i.e. on grid C where k1 = k2 = 0.252
l0 = 0.5 (4500-300) [1 + 0.252 / (0.45 + 0.252)]0.5 [1 + 0.252 / (0.45 + 0.252)]0.5
l0 = 0.5 × 4200 × 1.36
= 0.68 × 4200 = 2856 mm
Slenderness ratio, λ <5.8.3.2(1)>
λ = l0 / i
where
i = radius of gyration = (I / A)0.5 = h / 120.5
λ = 3570 × 120.5 / 500 = 24.7
Limiting slenderness ratio, λlim <5.8.3.1(1) & NA>
λlim = 20 ABC / n0.5
where
A = 1 / (1 + 0.2φef). Assume 0.7 as per default
B = (1 + 200)0.5. Assume 1.1 as per default
C = 1.7 – rm
where

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 15 of 25

 rm = M01 / M2 = –84.9 / 109.3 = –0.78
C = 1.7 + 0.78 = 2.48
n = NEd / Acfcd
= 8933 × 103 / (5002 × 0.85 × 50 / 1.5)
= 1.26
∴ λlim = 20 × 0.7 × 1.1 × 2.48 / 1.260.5 = 34.0
∴ as λ < λlim column is not slender
and 2nd order moments are not required.

5.4.9 Design moments, MEd

MEd = M + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd <5.8.8.2(1), 6.1(4)>
where
M = moment from 1st order analysis
eiNEd = effect of imperfections <5.8.8.2(1)>
where
ei = l0 / 400 <5.2.7>
e0NEd = minimum eccentricity <6.1(4)>
where
e0 = h / 30 ≥ 20 mm
MEdyy = 95.7 + (3570 / 400) × 8933 × 10−3 ≥ 0.02 × 8933
= 95.7 + 79.7 ≥ 178.7
= 175.4 < 178.7 kNm
MEdzz = 18.8 + 79.7 ≥ 178.7
= 178.7 kNm ∴ Both critical.
However, imperfections need only be taken in one direction – where they have the <5.8.9(2)>
most unfavourable effect ∴ use MEdzz = 178.7 with MEdyy = 95.7 kNm.

5.4.10 Design using charts <Concise EC2 Figs 15.5a to 15.5e>

MEdyy / bh2fck = 178.9 × 106 / (5003 × 50) = 0.03

NEd / bhfck = 9000 × 103 / (5002 × 50) = 0.72
Choice of chart based on d2 / h
where
d2 = depth to centroid of reinforcement in half section
assuming 12 bar arrangement with H32s
d2 = 35 + 8 + (32 / 2) + (2 / 6) [500 + 2 × (35 + 8 + 32 / 2 ) / 3]
= 59 + (1 / 3) × 127
= 101
∴ d2 / h = 101 / 500 = 0.2 Use Concise EC2 Figure 15.5d

Figure 5.9 Depth, d2, to centroid of reinforcement in half section

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 16 of 25

 From chart in Concise EC2Figure 15.5d) <Concise EC2 Fig. 15.5d>
Asfyk / bhfck = 0.30
As = 0.29 × 500 × 500 × 50 / 500
= 7500 mm2
‡‡
Try 12 no. H32 (9648 mm2) .

5.4.11 Check biaxial bending <5.8.9>

Slenderness: λy ≈ λz ∴ OK. <5.8.9(3)>
Eccentricities: as h = b check ey / ez
MEdz critical. (Imperfections act in z direction.)
95.7 × 106 / 9000 × 103
ey / ez =
178.7 × 106 / 9000 × 103
= 0.54 i.e. > 0.2 and < 5 <5.9.3(3), Exp. (5.38b)>
∴ design for biaxial bending.

Figure 5.10 Eccentricities

5.4.12 Design for biaxial bending

Check (MEdz / MRdz)a + (MEdy / MRdy)a ≤ 1.0 <5.9.3(4)Exp. (5.39)>
For load case 2 where:
MEdz = 178.7 kNm
MEdy = 95.7 kNm
MRdz = MRdy = moment resistance. Using charts:
From chart 15.5d, for d2 / h = 0.20 and
Asfyk / bhfck = 9648 × 500 / 500 × 500 × 50
= 0.39
NEd / bhfck = 9000 x 103 / (5002 x 50)
= 0.72
MRd / bh2fck = 0.057 <Concise EC2 Fig. 15.5d>
∴ MRd ≈ 0.057 × 5003 × 50
= 356.3 kNm
<5.8.3(4)>
a = exponent dependent upon NEd / NRd
where

‡‡
Using design actions to Exp (6.10) would have resulted in a requirement for 8500 mm2.

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 17 of 25

 NRd = Acfcd + Asfyd
= 500 × 500 × 0.85 × 50 / 1.5 + 9648 × 500 / 1.15
= 7083 + 3216
= 10299 kN
NEd / NRd = 9000 / 10299 = 0.87.
Interpolating between values given for NEd / NRd= 0.7 (1.5) and <Notes toExp. (5.39)>
for NEd / NRd= 1.0, (2.0)
a = 1.67
Check (MEdz / MRdz)a + (MEdy / MRdy)a ≤ 1.0
(178.7 / 356.3)1.67 + (95.7 / 356.3)1.67 = 0.32 + 0.11
= 0.43 i.e. < 1.0 ∴ OK
Use 12 no. H32

5.4.13 Links
Minimum diameter of links: = φ / 4 = 32 / 4 <9.5.3 & NA>
= 8 mm
Spacing: either
a) 0.6 × 20 × φ = 12 × 32 = 384 mm <9.5.3(3), 9.5.3(4)>
b) 0.6 × h = 0.6 × 500 = 300 mm or
c) 0.6 × 400 = 240 mm
∴ use H8 links at 225 mm cc.
Number of legs:
Bars at 127 mm cc i.e. < 150 mm ∴ no need to restrain bars in face but good <9.5.3(6)
practice suggests alternate bars should be restrained SMDSC 6.4.2>
∴ use single leg on face bars both ways @ 225 mm centres.

5.4.14 Design summary

Figure 5.11 Design summary: internal column

5.5 Small perimeter column subject to two hour fire requirement

This calculation is intended to show a small slender column subject to a requirement for 2
hours fire resistance.
§§
The middle column, B, in Figure 4.5, is subject to an axial load of 1722.7 kN and from
analysis moments of 114.5 kNm in the plane at the beam and 146.1 kNm perpendicular to
the beam (i.e. about the z axis).
The column is 350 mm square, 4000 mm long, measured from top of foundation to centre of
slab. It is supporting storage loads, in an external environment (but not subject to de-icing
salts) and is subject to a 2 hour fire resistance requirement on three exposed sides. Assume
the base is pinned.

§§
Gk = 562.1; Qk = 755.6 × αn = 755.6 × 0.9; NEd = 562.1 × 1.25 + 755.6 × 0.9 × 1.5 = 1722.7 kN

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 18 of 25

 Figure 5.12
Perimeter column

5.5.1 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom
cnom = cmin + Δcdev <Exp. (4.1)>
where
cmin = max[cmin,b, cmin,dur]
where
cmin,b = diameter of bar. Assume 32 mm main bars and 10 mm links <4.4.1.2(3)>
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions. Assuming <BS 8500–1 Table
primarily XC3 / XC4, secondarily XF1, cmin,dur = 25 mm A4>
Δcdev = allowance in design for deviation
= 10 mm
∴ try cnom = 32 + 10 = 42 mm to main bars
or = 25 + 10 = 35 mm to 8 mm links
Try cnom = 35 mm to 8 mm links

5.5.2 Fire resistance

a) Check adequacy of section for R120 to Method A.
Axis distance available = 43 mm + φ / 2
Required axis distance to main bars, a for 350 mm square column <BS EN 1991–1–2:
For μfi = 0.5, a = 45 mm; and 5.3.1(1) & NA
for μfi = 0.7, a = 57 mm, providing: 5.3.2, Table 5.2a>
ƒ 8 bars used – OK but check later
ƒ l0,fi ≤ 3 m – OK but check
ƒ e ≤ emax = 0.15h = 0.15 × 350 = 52 mm
but e = 146.1 × 106 / 1722.7 × 103
= 85 mm ∴ no good.
Try Method B.
b) Check adequacy of section for R120 to Method B. <BS EN 1992–1–2:
Determine parameters n, ω, e and check λfi. 5.3.3, Table 5.2b>

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 19 of 25

 Assume 4 no. H32 + 4 no. H25 = (5180 mm2 : 4.2%)
(say 4.2% OK – integrity OK) <9.5.2(3)>
n = N0Ed,fi / 0.7(Acfcd + Asfyd) <BS EN 1992–1–2:
Exp. (5.8a)>
= 0.7 × 1722.7 × 103 / 0.7 (350 × 350 × αcc × fck / γC + 5180 × 500 / γS)
= 1205.9 × 103 / 0.7 (350 × 350 × 0.85 × 30 / 1.5 + 5180 × 500 / 1.15)
= 1205.9 × 103 / 0.7 (2082.5 + 2252.0)
= 0.40 OK
ω = Asfyd / Acfcd ≤ 1.0 <BS EN 1992–1–2:
= 2252 / 2082 5.3.3(2)>
= 1.08 ≥ 1
But say within acceptable engineering tolerance ∴use ω = 1.0 OK

e = M0Ed,fi / N0Ed,fi <BS EN 1992–1–2:

Exp. (5.8b)>
= 0.7 × 146.1 / 0.70 × 1722.7 <BS EN 1992–1–2:
= 85 mm ≡ 0.24h. OK 2.4.2(3)>
λfi = l0,fi / i
where
l0,fi = 0.7l = 0.7 × 4000 = 2800 mm
i = radius of gyration
= h / 3.46 for a rectangular section
∴ λfi = 2800 / (350 / 3.46)
= 27.7 < 30 ∴ OK.
Table 5.2b valid for use in this case
Interpolating from BS EN 1992–1–2 Table 5.2b for n = 0.40 and ω = 1.0, column
width = 350 mm and axis distance = 48 mm
∴ Axis distance = 43 mm + φ / 2 is OK

c) As additional check, check adequacy of section to Annex B3 and Annex C. <BS EN 1992–1–2:
Using BS EN 1992–1–2 Table C.8 5.3.3(1), Annex C &
NA>
For ω = 1.0, e = 0.25b, R120, λ = 30 <BS EN 1992–1–2:
and interpolating between n = 0.3 and n = 0.5, Annex C(2)>
bmin = 350 mm, amin = 48 mm.
∴ Axis distance = 43 mm + φ / 2 is OK
∴ 4 no. H32 + 4 no. H25 with 35 mm cover to 8 mm links
(a = 55 mm min.) OK.

5.5.3 Structural design: check slenderness about z axis

Effective length, l0, about z axis
l0z = 0.5l [1 + k1 / (0.45 + k1) ]0.5 [1 + k2 / (0.45 + k2) ]0.5 <Exp. (5.15)>
where <PD 6687 2.10>
l = clear height between restraints
= 4000 – 300 / 2 = 3850 mm
k1, k2 = relative flexibilities of rotational restraints at ends 1 and 2
respectively
k1 = EIcol / lcol / [2EIbeam1 / lbeam1 + 2EIbeam2 / lbeam2] ≥ 0.1 <5.8.3.2(3)
PD 6687>
Treating beams as rectangular and cancelling E throughout:
Icol / Pcol = 3504 / (12 × 3850) = 3.25 × 105
Ibeam1 / lbeam1 = 8500 × 3003 / 12 × 6000
= 31.8 × 105

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 20 of 25

 Ibeam2 / lbeam2 = 0
k1 = 3.25 / (2 × 31.8) = 0.051 ≥ 0.1
k1 = 0.1
k2 = by inspection (pinned end assumed) = ∞
∴ l0z = 0.5 × 3850 × [1 + 0.1 / (0.45 + 0.1) ]0.5 [1 + ∞ / (0.45 + ∞) ]0.5
= 0.5 × 3850 × 1.087 × 1.41
= 0.77 × 3850 = 2965 mm
Slenderness ratio, λz <5.8.3.2(1)>
λz = l0z / i
where
i = radius of gyration = h / 3.46
λz = 3.46l0z / h = 3.46 × 2965 / 350
= 29.3
Limiting slenderness ratio, λlim <5.8.3.1(1)>
λlimz = 20 ABC / n0.5 <Exp. (5.13N)
where
A = 0.7
B = 1.1
C = 1.7 – rm
where
rm = M01 / M02
say rm = 0
C = 1.7 – 0 = 1.7
n = relative normal force = NEd / Acfcd
= 1836 × 103 / (3502 × 0.85 × 30 / 1.5)
= 0.88
∴ λlimz = 20 × 0.7 × 1.1 × 1.7 / 0.880.5
= 27.9
∴ As λz > λlimz column is slender about z axis.

Figure 5.13
First order moments

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 21 of 25

5.5.4 Check slenderness on y axis
Effective length, l0, about z axis
l0y = 0.5l [1 + k1 / (0.45 + k1) ]0.5 [1 + k1 / (0.45 + k2) ]0.5 <Exp. (5.15)>
where
ly = clear height between restraints
= 4000 + 300 / 2 – 750 = 3400 mm
k1
Icol / lcol = 3504 / 12 × 3400 = 3.68 × 105
Treating beams as rectangular
Ibeam1 / lbeam1 = 350 × 7503 / [12 × (9000 – 350)]
= 14.2 × 105
Ibeam2 / lbeam2 = 350 × 7503 / [12 × (8000 – 350)]
= 16.1 × 105
k1 = 3.68 / (2 × (16.1 + 14.2) = 0.060 ≥ 0.1
k1 = 0.1
k2 = ∞ (pinned end assumed)
l0y = 0.5 × 3400 [1 + 0.1 / (0.45 + 0.1) ]0.5 [1 + ∞ / (0.45 + ∞) ]0.5 <Exp. (5.15)>
= 0.5 × 3400 × 1.087 × 1.41
= 0.77 × 3400 = 2620 mm
Slenderness ratio, λy
λy = 3.46l0y / h = 3.46 × 2620 / 350 = 25.9

Limiting slenderness ratio, λlim

λlimy = λlimz = 27.9
As λy < λlimy, column not slender in y axis.

5.5.5 Design moments: MEdz about z axis

MEdz = max[M02, M0Ed + M2, M01 + 0.5M2] <5.8.8.2>
where
M02 = Mz + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd <5.8.8.2(1)
where 6.1.4>
Mz = 146.1 kNm from analysis
eiNEd = effect of imperfections
where
ei = l0 / 400 <5.2.7>
e0 = 20 mm
∴ M02 = 146.1 + (2965 / 400) × 1836 ≥ 0.02 × 1836
= 146.1 + 13.6 > 36.7
= 159.7 kNm
M0Ed = equivalent 1st order moment at about z axis at about mid height may
be taken as M0ez where
M0ez = (0.6M02 + 0.4M01) ≥ 0.4M02
= 0.6 × 159.7 + 0.4 × 0 ≥ 0.4 × 159.7 = 95.8 kNm
M2 = nominal 2nd order moment = NEde2 <5.8.8.2(3)>
where
e2 = (1 / r) l02 / 10 <5.8.8. 3>
where
1/r = curvature = KvKϕ[fyd / (Es × 0.45d)] <Exp. (5.34)>
where
Kv = (nu – n) / (nu – nbal)
where

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 22 of 25

 nu =1+ω
where
ω = Asfyd / Acfd
= 1.08 as before
nu = 2.08
n = NEd / Acfcd
= 1722.7 / 2082 = 0.83
nbal = 0.40
Kv = (2.08 – 0.83) / (2.08 – 0.40)
= 1.25 / 1.68 = 0.74
Kϕ = 1 + βϕef
where
β = 0.35 + (fck / 200) – (λ / 150)
= 0.35 + 30 / 200 – 29.3 / 150
= 0.35 + 0.15 – 0.195
= 0.305
ϕef = effective creep coefficient
*** <5.8.4(2)>
= ϕ(∞,t0) M0Eqp / M0Ed
where
ϕ(∞,t0)= final creep coefficient <3.1.4(2)>
= from Figure 3.1 for inside conditions <Fig. 3.1a>
h = 350 mm, C30/37, t0 = 15
≈ 2.4
M0Eqp = 1st order moment due to quasi permanent loads
Gk + ϕ2 Qk
≈ × Mz + eiNEd
ξγGGk + ϕ0γQQk
63.3 + 0.8 × 46.0
= × Mz + eiNEd
1.25 × 63.3 + 1.5 × 46.0
100.1
= × 146.1 + 13.6
148.1
= 112.3 kNm
M0Ed = M02 = 159.7 kNm
Kϕ = 1 + 0.305 × 2.4 × 112.3 / 159.7
= 1.51
fyd = 500 / 1.15 = 434.8 MPa
Es = 200000 MPa <3.2.7(3)>
d = effective depth
= 350 – 35 – 8 – 16 = 291 mm
1/r = 0.74 × 1.51 × 434.8 / (200000 × 0.45 × 291)
= 0.0000186
l0 = 2965 mm as before
e2 = (1 / r) l02 / 10
= 0.0000186 × 29652 / 10
= 16.3 mm
∴ M2 = 1722.7 × 103 × 16.3 = 28.1 kNm
M01 =0
∴ MEdz = max[M02z, M0Edz + M2, M01 + 0.5M2]
= max[159.7, 95.8 + 28.1, 0 + 28.1 / 2] = 159.7 kNm

***
With reference to Exp. (5.13N), ϕef may be taken as equal to 2.0. However, for the purpose of
illustration the full derivation is shown here.

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 23 of 25

5.5.6 Design moments: MEdy about y axis
MEdy = max[ M02y, M0Edy + M2, M01 + 0.5M2]
where
M02y = My + eiNEd ≥ e0NEd
†††
= 114.5 + 13.6 ≥ 36.7 kNm
= 128.1 kNm
M0Edy = (0.6M02y + 0.4 M01y) ≥ 0.4M02y
= 0.6 × 114.5 + 0.4 × 0
= 68.7 kNm
M2 0: column not slender.
∴ MEdy = 128.1 kNm

5.5.7 Design in each direction using charts

In z direction: NEd / bhfck = 1722.7 × 103 / (3502 × 30)
= 0.47
MEd / bh2fck = 159.7 × 106 / (3503 × 30)
= 0.124
Assuming 8 bar arrangement, centroid of bars in half section:
d2 ≥ 35 + 8 + 16 + (350 / 2 – 35 –8 – 16) × 1 / 4 <Concise EC2 Fig.
≥ 59 + 29 = 88 mm 15.4>
d2/h = 0.25
<Concise EC2 Fig.
From Figure 15.5e
15.5e>
Asfyk / bhfck = 0.45
As = 0.45 × 3502 × 30 / 500 = 3308 mm2
∴ 4 no. H32 + 4 no. T25 (5180 mm2) OK.
In y direction: MEd / bh2fck = 128.1 × 106 / (3503 × 30)
= 0.10
NEd / bhfck = 0.47
From Figure 15.5e
Asfyk / bhfck = 0.31
As = 0.31 × 3502 × 30 / 500 = 2279 mm2
∴ 4 no. H32 + 4 no. T25 (5180 mm2) OK.

5.5.8 Check biaxial bending

λy ≈ λz ∴ OK. <Exp. (5.38a)>
ez = MEdy / NEd
ey = MEdz / NEd
ey / heq MEdz 159.7
= = = 1.25
ez / beq MEdy 128.1
∴ need to check biaxial bending.
(MEdz/MRdz)a + (MEdy/MRdy)a ≤ 1.0 <Exp. (5.39)>
where
MRdz = MRdy = moment resistance∴
Using Concise EC2 Figure 15.5e
Asfyk / bhfck = 5180 × 500 / (3502 × 30)
= 0.70
for NEd / bhfck = 0.47
MEd / bh2fck = 0.162 <Concise EC2 Fig. 15.5e>

†††
Imperfections need to be taken into account in one direction only. <5.8.9(2)>

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 24 of 25

 ∴ MRd = 0.162 × 3503 × 30
= 208.4 kNm

a depends on NEd / NRd

where
NRd = Acfcd + Asfyd
= 3502 × 0.85 × 30 / 1.5 + 5180 × 500 / 1.15
= 2082.5 + 2252.2
= 4332.7 kN
NEd / NRd = 1722.7 / 4332.7 = 0.40
∴ a = 1.25 <5.8.9(4)>
(159.7 / 208.4)1.25 + (114.5 / 208.4)1.25 = 0.72 + 0.47
= 1.19
∴ No good.
∴ Try 8 no. T32 (6432 mm2).
For Asfyk / bhfck = 6432 × 500 / (3502 × 30)
= 0.88
for NEd / bhfck = 0.47
MEd / bh2fck = 0.191 <Concise EC2 Fig.
15.5e>
∴ MRd = 245.7 kNm
Check biaxial bending
(159.7 / 245.7)1.25 + (114.5 / 245.7)1.25 = 0.58 + 0.39 = 0.97 OK.

5.5.9 Check maximum area of reinforcement

As / bd = 6432 / 3502 = 5.2% > 4% <9.5.2(3)
& NA>
However, if laps can be avoided in this single lift column then the integrity of
the concrete is unlikely to be affected and 5.2% is considered OK. OK <PD 6687 2.19>

5.5.10 Design of links

Diameter min. = 32 / 4 = 8 mm <9.5.3 & NA>
Spacing max. = 0.6 × 350 = 210 mm <9.5.3(3)
9.5.3(4)>
∴ Use H8 @ 200 mm cc

5.5.11 Design summary

Figure 5.14
Design summary: small perimeter column

WE 5 Columns v7b chg 13 Sep 07.doc 17 Sep. 07 Page 25 of 25

 Worked Examples for Eurocode 2

Draft Version

All advice or information from The Concrete Centre is intended for those who will evaluate
the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and
application.

No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or
information is accepted by the Concrete Centre or their subcontractors, suppliers or
advisors.

Readers should note that this is a draft version of a document and will be subject to
revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the
latest version.
4 Beams
4.1 General
The calculations in this Section are presented in the following parts:

4.2 A simply supported continuous beam showing what might be deemed typical hand
calculations.
4.3 A heavily loaded L-beam.
4.4 A wide T-beam. This example is analysed and designed strictly in accordance with the
provisions of BS EN 1992–1–1.

They are intended to be illustrative of the Code and not necessarily best practice.

A general the method of designing slabs is shown below:

1. Determine design life. <BS EN 1990 & NA Table

NA.2.1>
2. Assess actions on the beam. <BS EN 1991 & NAs>
3. Assess durability requirements and determine concrete strength. <Table 4.1>
<BS 8500-1: Tables A4, A5>
4. Check cover requirements for appropriate fire resistance period. <BS EN 1992–1–2: Tables 5.8,
5.9, 5.10, 5.11>
5. Calculate minimum cover for durability, fire and bond requirements. <4.4.1>
6. Determine which combinations of actions apply. <BS EN 1990 & NA Tables
NA.A1.1 and NA.A1.2 (B)>
7. Determine loading arrangements. <5.1.3(1) & NA>
8. Analyse structure to obtain critical moments and shear forces. <5.4, 5.5, 5.6>
9. Design flexural reinforcement. <6.1>
10. Check deflection. <7.4>
11. Check shear capacity. <6.2>
12. Other design checks:
Check minimum reinforcement. <9.3.1.1(1), 9.2.1.1(1)>
Check cracking (size or spacing of bars). <7.3, Tables 7.2N, 7.3N>
Check effects of partial fixity. <9.3.1.2(2)>
Check secondary reinforcement. <9.3.1.1(2), 9.3.1.4(1)>
13. Check curtailment. <9.3.1.1(4), 9.2.1.3, Fig. 9.2>
14. Check anchorage. <9.3.1.2, 8.4.4, 9.3.1.1(4),
9.2.1.5(1), 9.2.1.5(2)>
15. Check laps. <8.7.3>

4.2 Continuous beam on pin supports

This calculation is intended to show a typical hand calculation for a continuous simply
supported beam using coefficients to determine moments and shears.

A 450 mm deep × 300 mm wide rectangular beam is required to support office loads of gk =
30.2 kN / m and qk = 11.5 kN / m over 2 no. 6 m spans. fck = 30 MPa, fyk = 500 MPa. Assume
300 mm wide supports, a 50-year design life and a requirement for a 2-hour resistance to
fire in an external but sheltered environment.

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 2 of 33

 Figure 4.1
Continuous rectangular beam

Figure 4.2
Section through beam

4.2.1 Actions
kN / m
Permanent
gk = 30.2
Variable
qk = 11.5

4.2.2 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom
cnom = cmin + Δcdev <Exp. 4.1>
where
cmin = max[cmin,b; cmin,dur]
where
<4.4.1.2(3)>
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond
= diameter of bar.
Assume 25 mm main bars
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions.
Assuming XC3 (moderate humidity or cyclic wet and <Table 4.1 BS 8500-1
dry) and secondarily XF1 (moderate water saturation Table A4, How to xxxx[20]>
without de-icing salt) using C30/37 concrete ,
cmin,dur = 25 mm
Δcdev= allowance in design for deviation. Assuming no
measurement of cover Δcdev= 10 mm <4.4.1.2(3)>
∴ cnom = 25 + 10 = 35 mm
Fire:
Check adequacy of section for 2 hours fire resistance (i.e. R = 120)
For bmin = 300 mm, minimum axis distance, a = 35 mm ∴ OK <BS EN 1992-1-2, 5.6.3(1),
Table 5.6>
cnom = 35 mm

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 3 of 33

4.2.3 Load combination (and arrangement)
Load combination
By inspection, BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b) governs <Fig. 2.5>
∴ n = 1.25 × 30.2 + 1.5 × 11.5 = 50.8 kN / m <BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b)>
Arrangement
Choose to use all-and-alternate-spans-loaded load cases, i.e. <5.1.3(1) & NA option b,
use coefficients. Concise EC2 Table 15.3>
The coefficients used presume 15% redistribution at <Concise EC2 Table 15.3>
supports. As the amount of redistribution is less than 20%,
there are no restrictions on reinforcement grade. The use of <5.5(4) & NA>
Table 5.6 in BS EN 1992–1–2 is restricted to where <BS EN 1992-1-2
redistribution does not exceed 15%. 5.6.3(1), Table 5.6)>

4.2.4 Analysis
Design moments
Spans
MEd = (1.25 × 30.2 × 0.090 + 1.5 × 11.5 × 0.100) × 6.02 <Concise EC2 Table 15.3>
= 122.3 + 62.1 = 184.4 kNm
Support <Concise EC2 Table 15.3>
MEd = 50.8 × 0.106 × 6.02 = 193.8 kNm
Shear force
VAB = 0.45 × 6.0 × 50.8 = 137.2 kN
VAB = 0.63 × 6.0 × 50.8 = 192.0 kN

Table 4.1
Coefficients for use with beams (See Concise EC2 Table 15.3)
Coefficient Location
Outer Near middle At 1st At middle At interior
support of end span interior of interior supports
support spans
Moment gk and qk 25% spana — 0.094 — 0.075
Moment gk — 0.090 — 0.066 —
Moment qk — 0.100 — 0.086 —
Shear 0.45 — 0.63:0.55 — 0.50:0.50b
Conditions
For beams and slabs, 3 or more spans. (They may also be used for 2 span beams but support moment coefficient =
0.106 and internal shear coefficient = 0.63 both sides.)
Key
a At outer support ‘25% span’ relates to the UK Nationally Determined Parameter for BS EN 1992-1-1 9.2.1.2(1)
for minimum percentage of span bending moment to be assumed at supports in beams in monolithic
construction. 15% may be appropriate for slabs (see BS EN 1992-1-1 Cl 9.3.1.2).
b For beams of five spans, 0.55 applies to centre span.

4.2.5 Flexural design

Effective depth
Assuming 10 mm links:
d = 450 − 35 − 10 − 25 / 2 = 392 mm
Flexure in span

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 4 of 33

 K = MEd / bd2fck = 137.2 × 106 / (300 × 3922 × 30) = 0.099 <Fig. 3.5>
<Appendix A.1>
z / d = 0.90 <Concise EC2 Table 15.5>
z = 0.90 × 392 = 353 mm
As = MEd / fydz = 137.2 × 106 / (434.8 × 353) = 894 mm2
Try 2 no. H25 B (982 mm2)
(ρ = 0.76%)
Check spacing
Spacing = 300 – 2 × 35 − 2 × 10 – 25 = 185 mm
Assuming 10 mm diameter link
Steel stress under quasi-permanent loading
σs = (fyk / γs) (As,req / As,prov) (SLS loads / ULS loads) (1 / δ)
= fyd × (As,req / As,prov) × (gk + ψ2 qk) / (γGgk + γQqk) (1 / δ)
= (500 / 1.15) × (894 / 982) × [(30.2 + 0.3 × 11.5) / 50.8] (1 / 1.03)
= 434.8 × 0.91 × 0.66 × 0.97 = 253 MPa <7.3.3(2)>
As exposure is XC3, max. crack width wmax = 0.3 mm <7.3.1(5) & NA>
∴Maximum bar size = 14 mm or max. spacing = 185 mm – say OK <Table 7.2N & NA>
∴ Use 2 H25 B (982 mm2)
Deflection
Check span: effective depth ratio
Basic span: effective depth ratio for ρ = 0.76% = 27.4 <Table 7.4N & NA>
Max. span = 27.4 × 392 = 10740 mm ∴ OK
Flexure: support
MEd = 193.8 kNm
K = MEd / bd2fck
where
d = 450 − 35 − 10 − 25 / 2 = 392 mm
K = 193.8 × 106 / (300 × 3922 × 30) = 0.142
By inspection, K ≤ K′ (0.142 × 0.168‡) ∴ no compression
reinforcement required.
z = 0.85d <Appendix A.1>
= 0.85 × 392 = 333 mm <Concise EC2 Table 15.5>
As = MEd / fydz
= 193.8 × 106 / 434.8 × 333 = 1338 mm2 .
(ρ = 1.13%)
Try 3 no. H25 T (1473 mm2)

4.2.6 Shear
Support B (critical)
Shear at central support = 192.0 kN
At face of support
VEd = 192.0 − (0.300 / 2 + 0.392) × 50.8 = 164.50 kN <6.2.1(8)>
vEd = VEd / bd
= 164.5 × 103 / (392 × 300) = 1.40 MPa
Maximum shear capacity

‡
K′ is limited to 0.208. However, if, as is usual practice in the UK, x / d is limited to 0.45, z / d is as a
consequence limited to 0.82 and K′ to 0.168.

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 5 of 33

 Assuming fck = 30 MPa and cot θ = 2.5§
vRd,max** = 3.64 MPa <Concise EC2 Table 15.7>
vRd,max > vEd ∴ OK

Shear reinforcement
Assuming z = 0.9 d <6.2.3(1)>
Asw / s ≥ VEd / (0.9 d × fywd × cot θ) <6.2.3(3), Exp. (6.8)>
≥ 164.5 × 103 / (0.9 × 392 × (500 / 1.15) × 2.5) = 0.429
More accurately, <6.2.3(3), Exp. (6.8)>
Asw / s ≥ VEd / (z × fywd × cot θ)
≥ 164.5 × 103 / (333 × 1087) = 0.454
Minimum shear links, <9.2.2(5)>
Asw,min / s = 0.08bwfck0.5 / fyk
= 0.08 × 300 × 300.5 / 500 = 0.263 Not critical
Max. spacing = 0.75d = 0.75 × 392 = 294 mm <9.2.2(6)>
Use H8 @ 200 (Asw / s = 0.50)
Support A (and C)
Shear at end support = 137.2 kN
At face of support
VEd = 137.2 − (0.150 + 0.392) × 50.8 = 109.7 kN <6.2.1(8)>
By inspection,shear reinforcement required and cot θ = 2.5 <Concise EC2 Fig. 15.1a>
Asw / s ≥ VEd / (z × fywd × cot θ) <Concise EC2 15.5.3>
≥ 109.7 × 103 / [353 × (500 / 1.15) × 2.5] = 0.285
Use H8 @ 200 (Asw / s = 0.50) throughout††

4.2.7 Summary of design

Figure 4.3
Continuous rectangular beam: Summary of design

Note
It is presumed that the detailer would take this design and detail the slab to normal best practice, e.g.
to Standard method of detailing structural concrete[21]. This would usually include dimensioning and
detailing curtailment, laps, U-bars and also undertaking the other checks detailed in Section 4.2.8.

4.2.8 Other design/detailing checks

Minimum area of reinforcement
As,min = 0.26 (fctm / fyk) btd ≥ 0.0013 btd <9.2.1.1>

§
The absolute maximum for vRd,max (and therefore the maximum value of vEd) would be 5.28 MPa when
cot θ would equal 1.0 and the variable strut angle would be at a maximum of 45°.
**
For determination of VRd,max see Section 4.3.10.
††
As maximum spacing of links is 294 mm, changing spacing of links would appear to be of limited
benefit.

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 6 of 33

 where <Table 3.1>
bt = width of tension zone
fctm = 0.30 × fck 0.666
As,min = 0.26 × 0.30 × 300.666 × 300 × 392 / 500 = 366 mm2
Curtailment main bars
Bottom: curtail < How to: Detailing>
75% main bars 0.08l from end support
= 480 mm say 450 mm from A
70% main bars 0.30l – al = 1800 − 1.125 × 392
= 1359 mm say 1350 from A
Top: curtail
40% main bars 0.15l + al = 900 + 441
= 1341 mm say 1350 from B
65% main bars 0.30l + al = 1800 + 441
= 2241 mm say 2250 from B
At supports
25% of As to be anchored at supports <9.2.1.2.(1), 9.2.1.4(1) & NA
25% of 894 mm2 = 223 mm2 9.2.1.5(1)>
Use min. 2 no. H12 (226 mm2) at supports A, B and C
In accordance with SMDSC[21] detail MB1 lap U-bars tension lap with main steel.
Tension lap = 780 mm (in C30/37 concrete, H12, ‘poor’ bond condition) < How to: Detailing>
= say 800 mm

Figure 4.4
Continuous rectangular beam: RC details

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 7 of 33

4.3 Heavily loaded L-beam

Figure 4.5
Heavily loaded L-beam

This edge beam supports heavy loads from storage loads. The variable point load is
independent of the variable uniformly distributed load. The beam is supported on 350 mm
square columns 4000 mm long. fck = 30 MPa; fyk = 500 MPa. The underside surface is subject
to an external environment and a 2 hour fire resistance requirement. The top surface is
internal subject to a 2 hour fire resistance requirement. Assume that any partitions are
liable to be damaged by excessive deflections.

Figure 4.6
Section through L-beam

4.3.1 Actions
Permanent:
UDL from slab and cladding gk = 46.0 kN / m

Point load from storage area above = 88.7 kN

Variable
From slab qk = 63.3 kN / m
Point load from storage area above = 138.7 kN

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 8 of 33

4.3.2 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom, underside and side of beam

cnom = cmin + Δcdev <Exp. (4.1)>

where
cmin = max[cmin,b, cmin,dur]
where
<4.4.1.2(3)>
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond
= diameter of bar. Assume 32 mm main bars
and 10 mm links
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental conditions.
Assuming primarily XC3 / XC4 exposure (moderate <Table 4.1 BS 8500-1
humidity or cyclic wet and dry); secondarily XF1 Table A4>
exposure (moderate water saturation without de-
icing salt, vertical surfaces exposed to rain and
freezing) and C30 / 37 concrete,
cmin,dur = 25 mm
Δcdev = allowance in design for deviation. Assuming no
measurement of cover Δcdev= 10 mm <4.4.1.2(3)>

∴ cnom = 32 + 10 = 42 mm to main bars

or = 25 + 10 = 35 mm to links
Use cnom = 35 mm to links
(giving cnom = 45 mm to main bars)

Fire:
Check adequacy of section for 2 hours fire resistance R120 <BS EN 1992-1-2 5.6.3>
By inspection, BS EN 1992–1–2 Table 5.6 web thickness OK <BS EN 1992-1-2, Table 5.6>
Axis distance, a, required = 35 mm OK by inspection <BS EN 1992-1-2, Table 5.6>
∴ Try 35 mm nominal cover bottom and sides to 10 mm link

Nominal cover, cnom, top

By inspection
cnom = cmin + Δcdev <Exp. (4.1)>
where
cmin = max[cmin,b; cmin,dur]
where
<4.4.1.2(3)>
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond
= diameter of bar. Assume 32 mm main bars
and 10 mm links
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental
conditions. Assuming primarily XC1 and <Table 4.1 BS 8500-1
C30/37 concrete, cmin,dur = 15 mm Table A4>
Δcdev = allowance in design for deviation. Assuming no
measurement of cover Δcdev = 10 mm <4.4.1.2(3)>
∴ cnom = 32 + 10 = 42 mm to main bars
or = 15 + 10 = 25 mm to links
Use cnom = 35 mm to links (giving cnom = 45 mm to main bars)

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 9 of 33

4.3.3 Idealisation, load combination and arrangement
Load combination
As loads are from storage Exp. (6.10a) is critical. <Table 2.5>
<BS EN 1990 A1.2.2, NA & Exp.
(6.10a)>
Idealisation
This element is treated as a continuous beam framing into <5.3.1(3)>
columns 350 × 350‡‡ × 4000 mm long columns below
Arrangement
Choose to use all-and-alternate-spans-loaded <5.1.3(1) & NA option b>

4.3.4 Analysis
Analysis by computer, assuming simple supports and including 15% redistribution at <BS EN 1990 A1.2.2 & NA,
supports (with, in this instance, consequent redistribution in span moments). 5.3.1 (6)>

Table 4.2
Elastic and redistributed moments kNm
Span number 1 2
Elastic M 1168 745
Redistributed M 1148 684
δ 0.98 0.92

Figure 4.7
Redistributed envelope, kNm

‡‡
Note: 350 × 350 is a minimum for columns requiring a fire resistance of 120 minutes
<BS EN 13670
Table 5.2a>

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 10 of 33

 Figure 4.8
Redistributed shears, kN

4.3.5 Flexural design, support A

MEd = 195 kNm in hogging
MEd,min = 1148 × 0.25 in hogging and in sagging <9.2.1.2(1), 9.2.1.4(1) & NA>
= 287 kNm
K = MEd / bd2fck
where
b = beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 <5.3.2.1, Fig. 5.3>
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 = distance between webs / 2
l0 = nominal: assume 0§§
<Fig. 5.2>
∴ beff1 = 0 mm = beff2
∴ b = bw = 350 mm
d = 750 − 35 – 10 – 32 / 2 = 689 mm
assuming 10 mm link and H32 in support
fck = 30 MPa
K = 287 × 106 / (350 × 6892 × 30)
= 0.058
Restricting x / d to 0.45 <Appendix A1>
K′  = 0.168
K ≤ K′ ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression reinforcement required
z = (d / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d <Appendix A1>
= (689 / 2) (1 + 0.89) ≤ 0.95 × 689
= 652 ≤ 654 ∴ z = 652 mm
As = MEd / fydz
where
fyd = 500 / 1.15 = 434.8 MPa
= 287 × 106 / (434.8 × 652) = 1012 mm2
Try 2 no. H32 U-bars (1608 mm2)

§§
The distance l0 is described as the distance between points of zero moment, ‘which may <5.3.2.1(2)>
be obtained from Figure 5.2’. In this case l0 = 0. (see figure 4.11) <Figure 5.2>.

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 11 of 33

Check anchorage of H32 U-bars
Bars need to be anchored distance ‘A’ into column <SMDSC 6.4.2>

Figure 4.9
Distance ‘A’

Assuming column uses 35 mm cover 10 mm links and 32 mm bars

Distance ‘A’ = 2 [350 − 2 (35 + 10) ] − 32 / 2 − 32 / 2 + 750 – [2 (35 + 10)]
− 2 × 32 / 2 – (4 − π) (3.5 + 0.5) × 32 <SMDSC, BS 8666[28]
= 488 + 628 – 110 = 1006 mm Table 2>
Anchorage length,
lbd = αlb,rqd ≥ lb,min <8.4.4, Exp. (8.4)>
where
α = conservatively 1.0
lb,req = (ϕ / 4) (σsd / fbd) <Exp. (8.3)>

where
ϕ = 32
σsd = design stress in the bar at the ULS
= 434.8 × 1012 / 1608 = 274 MPa
fbd = ultimate bond stress <8.4.2 (2)>
= 2.25 η1 η2 fct,d
where
η1 = 1.0 for good bond conditions
η 2 = 1.0 for bar diameter ≤ 32 mm <3.1.6 (2),Tables 3.1 & 2.1, &
fct,d = αct fctk / γc NA>
= 1.0 × 2.0 / 1.5
= 1.33 MPa
fbd = 2.25 × 1.33 = 3.0 MPa
lb,rqd = (32 / 4) (274 / 3.0) = 731 mm***
lb,min =max[10ϕ; 100 mm] = 250 mm
∴ lbd = 731 mm i.e. < 1006 mm ∴ OK
Use 2 no. H32 U-bars

***
Anchorage lengths may be obtained from published tables. In this instance, a figure of 900 mm may
be obtained from Table 13 of the How to on Detailing. <How to: Detailing [12]>

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 12 of 33

4.3.6 Flexural design span AB
Span AB – Flexure
MEd = 1148 kNm
K = MEd / bd2fck
where
b = beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 <5.3.2.1, Fig. 5.3>
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 = distance between webs / 2
Assuming beams at 7000 mm cc
= (7000 – 350) / 2 = 3325 mm <Fig. 5.2>
l0 = 0.85 × l1 = 0.85 × 9000 = 7650 mm†††

Figure 4.10
<Fig. 5.3>
Effective flange width beff

Figure 4.11
<Fig. 5.2>
Elevation showing definition of lo for calculation of flange width

beff1 = 0.2 × 3325 + 0.1 × 7650 ≤ 0.2 × 7650 ≤ 3325

= 1430 ≤ 1530 ≤ 3325
= 1430 mm
bw = 350 mm
beff2 = (0.2b2 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b2

†††
The distance l0 is described as the distance between points of zero shear, ‘which may <5.3.2.1(2)>
be obtained from Figure 5.2’. From the analysis, l0 could have been taken as 7200 mm. <Figure 5.2>

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 13 of 33

 where
b2 = 0 mm,
beff2 = 0 mm
b = 1430 + 350 + 0 = 1780 mm
d = 750 − 35 – 10 – 32 / 2 = 689 mm
assuming 10 mm link and H32 in span
fck = 30 MPa
K = 1148 × 106 / (1780 × 6892 × 30)
= 0.045
restricting x / d to 0.45 <Appendix A1>
K′ = 0.168
K ≤ K′ ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression
reinforcement required
z = (d / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d <Appendix A1>
= (689 / 2) (1 + 0.917) ≤ 0.95 × 689
= 661 ≤ 654 ∴ z = 654 mm
But z = d – 0.4x <Appendix A1>
∴ by inspection, neutral axis is in flange and as x < 1.25 hf,
design as rectangular section.
As = MEd / fydz
where
fyd = 500 / 1.15 = 434.8 MPa
= 1148 × 106 / (434.8 × 654) = 4037 mm2
Try 5 no. H32 B (4020 mm2) (say OK)

Check spacing of bars

Spacing of bars = [350 – 2 × (35 + 10) – 32] / (5 – 1)
= 57
Clear spacing = 57 – 32 mm = 25 mm between bars
Minimum clear distance between bars <8.2(2) & NA>
= max[bar diameter; aggregate size + 5 mm]
= max[32; 20 + 5]
= 32 mm i.e. > 25 mm
∴ 5 no. H32 B no good
For 4 bars in one layer, distance between bars = 44 mm so
Try 4 no. H32 B1 + 2 no. H32 B3

Figure 4.12
Span AB bottom reinforcement

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 14 of 33

 d = 750 − 35 – 10 – 32 / 2 – 0.333 × 2 × 32 = 668 mm
K = 1148 × 106 / (1780 × 6682 × 30) = 0.048
K ≤ K′ ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression <Appendix A1>
reinforcement required
z = (d / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d <Appendix A1>
= (668 / 2) (1 + 0.911) ≤ 0.95 × 668
= 639 ≤ 635 ∴ z = 635 mm
∴ by inspection, neutral axis in flange so design as <Appendix A1>
rectangular section.
As = MEd / fydz
= 1148 × 106 / (434.8 × 635) = 4158 mm2
∴ 4 no.H32 B1 + 2 no. H32 B3 (4824 mm2) OK
Span AB – Deflection
Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 <Concise EC2 Sec. 15.7>
where
N = Basic l / d: check whether ρ > ρ0 and whether to use <7.4.2(2), Exp. (7.16a), Exp.
Exp. (7.16a) or Exp. (7.16b) (7.16b)>

ρ = As / Ac‡‡‡ = As,req / [bwd + (beff − bw)hf] <PD 6687>

= 4158 / [350 × 668 + (1780 − 350) × 300]
= 4158 / 662800
= 0.63%
ρ0 = fck0.5 / 1000 = 300.5 / 1000 = 0.55%
ρ > ρ0 ∴ use Exp. (7.16b)
N = 11 + 1.5 f ρ0 / (ρ – ρ‘) + fck0.5 (ρ’ / ρ0)0.5 / 12
ck
0.5
<Exp. (7.16b)>
= 11 + 1.5 (30 × 0.055 / (0.063 − 0) + 300.5 (0 / 0.55)1.5
0.5

= 11 + 7.2 + 0 = 18.2
K = (end span) = 1.3 <Table 7.4N & NA>
F1 = (beff / bw = 1780 / 350 = 5.1) = 0.80 <7.4.2(2), Concise EC2 10.5.2>
F2 = 7.0 / leff (span > 7.0 m) <7.4.2(2)>
where
leff = 9000 mm <5.3.2.2(1)>
F2 = 7.0 / 9.0 = 0.77
F3 = 310 / σs
where
σs in simple situations = (fyk / γs) (As,req / As,prov) (SLS loads / ULS loads)
(1 / δ). However in this case separate analysis at SLS would be
required to determine σs. Therefore as a simplification use the
conservative assumption:
310 / σs = (500 / fyk) (As,req / As,prov) <Exp. (7.17)>
= (500 / 500) × (4824 / 4158) = 1.16
∴ Permissible l / d = 18.2 × 1.3 × 0.80 × 0.77 × 1.16 = 16.9
Actual l / d = 9000 / 668 = 13.5
As permissible less than actual
∴ OK
∴ 4 no. H32 B1 + 2 no. H32 B3 (4824 mm2) OK

2.18 of PD 6687[5] suggests that ρ in T sections should be based on the area of concrete above the
‡‡‡

centroid of the tension steel.

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 15 of 33

4.3.7 Flexural design support B
Support B
At centreline of support
M = 1394 kNm
From analysis, at face of support <5.3.2.2(3)>
MEdBA = 1209 kNm
MEdBC = 1315 kNm
K = MEd / bwd2fck
where
bw = 350 mm
d = 750 − 35 – 12 – 32 / 2 = 687 mm
assuming 10 mm link and H32 in support but allowing
for H12 T in slab
fck = 30 MPa
∴K = 1315 × 106 / (350 × 6872 × 30) = 0.265
for δ = 0.85, K′ = 0.168: to restrict x / d to 0.45, K′ = 0.167 <Appendix A1>
∴ Compression steel required <Concise EC2 Table 15.4
z = (d / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 K′)0.5]
= (687 / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 × 0.167)0.5]
= (687 / 2) (1 + 0.64) < 0.95d
= 563 mm

As2 = (K – K′)fckbd2 / fsc(d − d2) <Fig. 3.5, Appendix A1,

where How to: Beams>.
d2 = 35 + 10 + 32 / 2 = 61 mm
fsc = 700(x − d2) / x < fyd
where
x = 2.5 (d – z) = 2.5 (687 – 563) = 310 mm
fsc = 700 × (310 − 61) / 310 < 500 / 1.15
= 562 MPa but limited to ≤ 434.8 MPa
∴ As2 = (0.265 – 0.167) × 30 × 350 × 6872 / [434.8(687 − 61) ] = 1784 mm2
Try 4 no. H25 B (1964 mm2)
As = M′ / fydz + As2 fsc / fyd <Appendix A1>
= K′ fckbd2 / (fydz) + As2 fsc / fyd
= 0.167 × 30 × 350 × 6872 / (434.8 × 563) + 1570 × 434.8 / 434.8
= 3380 + 1784 = 5164 mm2
Try 4 no. H32 T + 4 no. H25 T (5180 mm2)
This reinforcement should be spread over beff <9.2.1.2(2), Fig. 9.1>
beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 <5.3.2.1, Fig. 5.3>
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 = distance between webs / 2.
Assuming beams at 7000 mm cc
= (7000 – 350) / 2 = 3325 mm
<Fig. 5.2>
l0 = 0.15 × (l1 + l2)
= 0.15 × (9000 + 8000) = 2550 mm
∴beff1 = 0.2 × 3325 + 0.1 × 2550 ≤ 0.2 × 2550 ≤ 3325
= 920 ≤ 510 ≤ 3325
= 510 mm

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 16 of 33

 bw = 350 mm
beff2 = (0.2b2 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b2
where
b2 = 0 mm
beff2 = 0 mm
∴ beff = 510 + 350 + 0 = 860 mm
Use 4 no. H32 T + 4 no. H25 T (5180 mm2) @ approx 100 mm cc

Figure 4.13
Support B reinforcement

4.3.8 Flexural design span BC

Span BC – Flexure
MEd = 684 kNm
K = MEd / bd2fck

where
b = beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 <5.3.2.1, Fig. 5.3>
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 = distance between webs / 2.
Assuming beams at 7000 mm cc <Fig. 5.2>
= (7000 – 350) / 2 = 3325 mm
l0 = 0.85 × l1 = 0.85 × 8000 = 6800 mm
beff1 = 0.2 × 3325 + 0.1 × 6800 ≤ 0.2 × 6800 ≤ 3325
= 1345 ≤ 1360 ≤ 3325
= 1360 mm
bw = 350 mm
beff2 = (0.2b2 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b2
where
b2 = 0 mm
beff2 = 0 mm
∴ b = 1360 + 350 + 0 = 1710 mm

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 17 of 33

 d = 750 − 35 – 10 – 32 / 2 = 689 mm
assuming 10 mm link and H32 in span
fck = 30 MPa
∴K = 684 × 106/ (1710 × 6892 × 30)
= 0.028
By inspection, K ≤ K′ ∴ section under-reinforced and no <Appendix A1>
compression reinforcement required
z = (d / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d <Appendix A1>
= (689 / 2) (1 + 0.95) ≤ 0.95 × 689
= 672 > 655 ∴ z = 655 mm
By inspection, x < 1.25 hf design as rectangular section <Appendix A1>
As = MEd / fydz
= 684 × 106 / (434.8 × 655) = 2402 mm2
Try 2 no. H32 B + 2 no. H25 B (2590 mm2)
Span BC – Deflection
By inspection, compared with span AB OK

4.3.9 Flexural design, support C

By inspection, use 2 no. H25 U-bars as support A
Use 2 no. H25 U-bars

4.3.10 Design for beam shear, support A

At d from face of support
VEd = 646 − (350 / 2 + 0.689) × (1.35 × 46.0 + 1.5 × 63.3) <6.2.1(8), BS EN 1990 A1.2.2,
NA & Exp. (6.10a)>
= 646 – 0.864 × 157.1 = 510.3 kN
Check maximum shear resistance
VRd, max = αcw bw zνfcd / (cot θ + tan θ) <Exp. (6.9) & NA>
where
αcw = 1.0 <6.2.3 & NA>
bw= 350 mm as before
z = 0.9d <6.2.3(1)>
ν = 0.6 (1 − fck / 250) = 0.6 (1 − 30 / 250) = 0.528 <6.2.3(3) Note 1, Exp. (6.6N) &
= 30 / 1.5 = 20.0 MPa
fcd NA>
<2.4.2.4(1) & NA>
θ = angle of inclination of strut.
= 0.5 sin−1 {vEdz / [0.20 fck (1 – fck / 250) ] } ≥ cot−12.5
<Exp. (6.9), Appendix A2>
where
vEdz = VEd / bz = VEd / (b × 0.9d)
= 510.3 × 103 / (350 × 0.9 × 689) = 2.35 MPa
θ = 0.5 sin−1 {2.35 / [0.20 × 30 (1 – 30 / 250) ] } ≥ cot−12.5
= 0.5 sin−1 (0.445) ≥ cot−12.5
= 0.5 × 26.4° ≥ 21.8°
= 21.8°
∴ VRd,max= 1.0 × 350 × 0.90 × 689 × 0.528 × 20.0 / (2.5 + 0.4) = 790 kN
∴ OK

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 18 of 33

 Shear reinforcement
Shear links: shear resistance with links
VRd,s = (Asw / s) z fywd cot θ <Exp. (6.8)>
∴ Asw / s ≥ VEd / z fywd cot θ
where
Asw / s = area of legs of links/link spacing
z = 0.9d as before
fywd = 500 / 1.15 = 434.8 <2.4.2.4(1) & NA>
cot θ = 2.5 as before
Asw / s ≥ 510.3 × 103 / (0.9 × 689 × 434.8 × 2.5) = 0.76

Minimum Asw / s = ρw,minbwsin α <9.2.2(5), Exp. (9.4)>

where
ρw,min = 0.08 × fck0.5 / fyk = 0.08 × 300.5 / 500 <Exp. (9.5N) & NA>
= 0.00088
bw = 350 mm as before
α = angle between shear reinforcement and the
longitudinal axis. For vertical reinforcement sin α
= 1.0
∴ Minimum Asw / s = 0.00088 × 350 × 1 = 0.03
But <9.2.2(6)>
Maximum spacing of links longitudinally = 0.75d = 516 mm
∴ Try H10 @ 200 cc in 2 legs (Asw / s = 0.78)

4.3.11 Design for high beam shear, support B

As uniformly distributed load predominates consider at d from
face of support <6.2.1(8)>
VEd = 1098 − (350 / 2 + 0.689) × (1.35 × 46.0 + 1.5 × 63.3)
= 1098 – 0.864 × 157.1 = 962.3 kN
By inspection, shear reinforcement required and cot θ < 2.5.
Check VRd, max (to determine θ)
Check maximum shear resistance
As before
VRd, max = αcw bw zνfcd / (cot θ + tan θ)
where <Exp. (6.9) & NA>
αcw,bw, z, ν, fcd as before
θ = 0.5 sin−1 {vEdz / [0.20 fck (1 – fck / 250) ] } ≥ cot−12.5 <6.2.3 & NA>
where
vEdz = VEd / bz = VEd / (b0.9d) <6.2.3(1)>
= 962.3 × 103 / (350 × 0.9 × 687) = 4.45 MPa <6.2.3(3) Note 1, Exp. (6.6N) &
θ = 0.5 sin−1 {4.45 / [0.20 × 30 (1 – 30 / 250) ] } ≥ cot−12.5 NA>
= 0.5 sin−1 (0.843) ≥ cot−12.5 <2.4.2.4(1) & NA>
= 0.5 × 57.5° ≥ 21.8°
= 28.7° <Exp. (6.9), Appendix A2>
cot θ = 1.824 i.e. > 1.0 ∴OK <6.2.3(2) & NA>
tan θ = 0.548
∴ VRd,max= 1.0 × 350 × 0.90 × 687 × 0.528 × 20.0 / (1.824 + 0.548) = 963.4 kN OK
(i.e. VRdmax ≈ VEd)

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 19 of 33

 Shear reinforcement
Shear links: shear resistance with links
VRd,s = (Asw / s) z fywd cot θ <Exp. (6.8)>
∴ Asw / s ≥ VEd / z fywd cot θ
Asw / s ≥ 962.3 × 103 / (0.9 × 687 × 434.8 × 1.824) = 1.96
∴ Use H10 @ 150 cc in 4 legs (Asw / s = 2.09)

4.3.12 Design for beam shear (using design chart), support Bc

At d from face of support <6.2.1(8)>
VEd = 794 – 0.864 × 157.1 = 658.3 kN
vEdz = VEd / bz = VEd / (b0.9d)
= 658.3 × 103/ (350 × 0.9 × 687) = 3.04 MPa
From chart Asw / sreqd / m width = 2.75 <Concise EC2 Fig. 15.1b>
Asw / sreqd = 2.75 × 0.35 = 0.96
∴ Use H10 in 2 legs @ 150 mm cc (Asw / s = 1.05)

4.3.13 Check shear capacity for general case

In mid span use H10 in 2 legs @ 300 mm cc (Asw / s = 0.52)
≡ Asw / sreqd / m width = 1.48 and an allowable vEdz = 1.60 MPa <Concise EC2 Fig. 15.1b>
≡ 1.60 × 350 × 0.90 × 687 = VEd = 346 kN
From analysis, VEd = 346.2 kN occurs at:
(646 − 346) / 157.1 = 1900 mm from A,
(1098 – 346 − 1.25 × 88.7 – 1.5 × 138.7) / 157.1 = 2755 mm from BA,
(794 − 346) / 157.1 = 2850 mm from BC and
(499 − 346) / 157.1 = 970 mm from C

4.3.14 Summary of design

Figure 4.14
Summary of L-beam design

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 20 of 33

 Figure 4.15
Section 1 – 1

4.4 Continuous wide T-beam

Figure 4.16
Continuous wide T-beam

This central spine beam supports the ribbed slab in Example 3.4. The 300 mm deep ribbed
slab is required for an office to support a variable action of 5 KN/m2. The beam is the same
depth as the slab and is supported on 400 mm square columns, see Figure 4.17. fck = 35 MPa;
fyk = 500 MPa. 1 hour fire resistance required, internal environment. Assume that partitions
are liable to be damaged by excessive deflections.

Figure 4.17
Section through T-beam

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 21 of 33

4.4.1 Actions
Permanent: UDL§§§
From analysis of slab gk = 47.8 kN / m
Variable
From analysis of slab qk = 45.8 kN / m

4.4.2 Cover
Nominal cover, cnom

cnom = cmin + Δcdev <Exp. (4.1)>

where
cmin = max[cmin,b; cmin,dur]
where
<4.4.1.2(3)>
cmin,b = minimum cover due to bond
= diameter of bar. Assume 25 mm main bars
and 8 mm links
cmin,dur = minimum cover due to environmental
conditions. Assuming XC1 and C30 / 37 <Table 4.1 BS 8500-1
concrete, cmin,dur = 15 mm Table A4>
Δcdev = allowance in design for deviation. Assuming no
measurement of cover Δcdev= 10 mm <4.4.1.2(3)>

∴ cnom = 15 + 10 = 25 mm to links
or = 25 + 10 = 35 mm to main bars
Use 10 mm diameter links to give cnom = 35 mm to main bars
and 25 mm to links (as per ribbed slab design)

Fire:
Check adequacy of section for REI 60 <BS EN 1992-1-2 5.6.3>
<BS EN 1992-1-2
Table 5.6>
Axis distance required
Minimum width bmin = 120 mm with a = 25mm <BS EN 1992-1-2
or bmin = 200 mm with a = 12 mm Table 5.6>
∴ at 2000 mm wide (min.) a < 12 mm
By inspection, not critical
Use 25 mm nominal cover to links

§§§
The actions may also have been estimated assuming an elastic reaction factor of 1.1 for the slab
viz:
Permanent: UDL kN / m
Loads from ribbed slab (7.50 + 9.0) / 2 × 4.30 × 1.1 = 39.0
Self-weight/patch load extra over solid 2.0 × 4.17 = 8.3
47.3
Variable
Imposed (7.50 + 9.0) / 2 × 5.00 × 1.1 = 45.4

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 22 of 33

4.4.3 Idealisation, load combination and arrangement
Load combination
By inspection, Exp. (6.10b) is critical. <Fig. 2.5>
47.8 × 1.25 + 45.8 × 1.5 = 128.5 kN / m **** <BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b)>
Idealisation
This element is treated as a beam on pinned supports.
The beam will be provided with links to carry shear and to
accommodate the requirements of Cl. 9.2.5 – indirect
support of the ribbed slab described in Section 3.3.8.
Arrangement
Choose to use all-and-alternate-spans-loaded. <5.1.3(1) & NA option b>

4.4.4 Analysis
Analysis by computer, assuming simple supports and including 15% redistribution <BS EN 1990 A1.2.2 &
at supports (with in this instance consequent redistribution in span moments). NA, 5.3.1 (6) >
Table 4.3
Elastic and redistributed moments, kNm
Span number 1 2 3 4
Elastic M 641.7 433.0 433.0 641.7
Redistributed M 606.4 393.2 393.2 606.4
δ 0.945 0.908 0.908 0.945

Figure 4.18
Redistributed envelope, kNm

****
cf. 126.7 kN / m from analysis of slab

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 23 of 33

 Figure 4.19
Redistributed shears, kN

4.4.5 Flexural design span AB

Span AB (and DE) – Flexure
MEd = 606.4 kNm
K = MEd / bd2fck
where
b = beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 <5.3.2.1, Fig. 5.3>
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 = distance between webs / 2
Referring to Figure 3.9
= (7500 – 1000 − 550) / 2 = 2975 mm
l0 = 0.85 × l1 = 0.85 × 7500 = 6375 mm <Fig. 5.2>
beff1 = 0.2 × 2975 + 0.1 × 6375 ≤ 0.2 × 6375 ≤ 2975
= 1232 ≤ 1275 ≤ 2975
= 1232 mm
bw = 2000 mm
beff2 = (0.2b2 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b2
where
b2 = distance between webs / 2.
Referring to Figure 3.9
= (9000 – 1000 − 550) / 2 = 3725 mm
l0 = 6375 mm as before
beff2 = 0.2 × 3725 + 0.1 × 6375 ≤ 0.2 × 6375 ≤ 3725
= 1382 ≤ 1275 ≤ 3725
= 1275 mm
b = 1232 + 2000 + 1275 = 4507 mm
d = 300 − 25 – 10 – 25 / 2 = 252 mm
assuming 10 mm link and H25 in span
fck = 35 MPa
K = 606.4 × 106 / (4507 × 2522 × 35)
= 0.061
K′ = 0.207 <Appendix A1>

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 24 of 33

 or restricting x / d to 0.45
K′ = 0.168
K ≤ K′ ∴ section under-reinforced and no compression
reinforcement required
z = (d / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d <Appendix A1>
= (252 / 2) (1 + 0.886) ≤ 0.95 × 252
= 238 ≤ 239 ∴ z =238 mm
But z = d – 0.4 x <Appendix A1>
∴ x = 2.5(d – z) = 2.5( 252 − 236) = 32 mm
∴ neutral axis in flange
as x < 1.25 hf design as rectangular section
As = MEd / fydz
where
fyd = 500 / 1.15 = 434.8 MPa
= 606.4 × 106 / (434.8 × 239) =5835 mm2
Try 12 no. H25 B (5892 mm2)
Span AB – Deflection
Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 <Concise EC2 Sec. 15.7>
where
N = Basic l / d: check whether ρ > ρ0 and whether to use <7.4.2(2), Exp. (7.16a), Exp.
Exp. (7.16a) or Exp. (7.16b) (7.16b)>
ρ = As / Ac†††† = As,req / [bwd + (beff − bw)hf] <PD 6687>
= 5835 / [2000 × 252 + (4507 − 2000) × 100]
= 5835 / 754700
= 0.77%
ρ0 = fck0.5 / 1000 = 350.5 / 1000 = 0.59%
ρ > ρ0 ∴ use Exp. (7.16b)
N = 11 + 1.5 f ρ0 / (ρ − ρ′) + fck0.5 (ρ′ / ρ0)0.5 / 12
ck
0.5
<Exp (7.16b)>
= 11 + 1.5 × 35 × 0.059 / (0.077 − 0) + 350.5 (0 / 0.59)1.5
0.5

= 11 + 6.8 + 0 =17.8
K = (end span) = 1.3 <Table 7.4N & NA>
F1 = (beff / bw = 4057 / 2000 = 2.03) = 0.90 <7.4.2(2), Concise EC2 10.5.2>
F2 = 7.0 / leff (span > 7.0 m) <7.4.2(2)>
where <5.3.2.2(1)>
leff = 7100 + 2 × 300 / 2 = 7400 mm
F2 = 7.0 / 7.4 = 0.95
F3 = 310 / σs
where
σs = (fyk / γs) (As,req / As,prov) (SLS loads / ULS loads) (1 / δ)
= 434.8 × (5835 / 5892) [(47.8 + 0.3 × 45.8) / (1.25 ×
47.8 + 1.5 × 45.8)] × (1 / 0.945)
= 434.8 × 0.99 × 0.48 × 1.06
= 219 MPa
F3 = 310 / σs <Exp. (7.17)>
= 310 / 219 = 1.41
∴ Permissible l / d = 17.8 × 1.3 × 0.90 × 0.95 × 1.41 = 27.9

2.18 of PD 6687[5] suggests that ρ in T sections should be based on the area of concrete above
††††

the centroid of the tension steel.

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 25 of 33

 Actual l / d = 7500 / 252 = 29.8 ∴ no good
Try 13 no. H25 B (6383 mm2)
F3 = 310 / σs
= 310 / 219 × 13 / 12 = 1.53‡‡‡‡ = say 1.50
∴ Permissible l / d = 17.8 × 1.3 × 0.90 × 0.95 × 1.50 = 29.7
Actual leff / d = 7400 / 252 = 29.4 Say OK
Use 13 no. H25 B (6383 mm2)

4.4.6 Flexural design support B

Support B (and D)
At centerline of support
M = 657.4 kNm
At face of support <5.3.2.2(3)>
MEd = 657.4 – 0.2 × 517.9 + 0.202 × 128.5 / 2
= 657.4 – 101.0
= 556.4 kNm
K = MEd / bwd2fck
where
bw = 2000 mm
d = 300 − 25 cover − 12 fabric − 8 link – 16 bar − 25 / 2 bar
= 226 mm

Figure 4.20 Section at solid/rib intersection

K = 556.4 × 106 / (2000 × 2262 × 35) = 0.156

By inspection, K < K′
K′ = 0.167 maximum (or for δ = 0.85, K′ = 0.168) <Appendix A1>
∴ No compression steel required <Concise EC2 Table 15.4>
z = (226 / 2)[1 + (1 − 3.53 K′)0.5]
= (226 / 2)[1 + (1 − 3.53 × 0.156)0.5]
= (226 / 2) (1 + 0.67) < 0.95d
= 189 mm
As = MEd / fydz
= 556.4 × 106 / (434.8 × 189) = 6770 mm2
Try 14 no. H25 T (6874 mm2)

To be spread over beff <9.2.1.2(2), Fig. 9.1>

beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 <5.3.2.1, Fig. 5.3>

‡‡‡‡
Both As,prov / As,req and any adjustment to N obtained from Exp. (7.16a) or Exp. (7.16b) is restricted
to 1.5 by Note 5 to Table NA.5 in the UK NA.

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 26 of 33

 where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 referring to Figure 3.9
= (7500 – 1000 – 550) / 2 = 2975 mm
l0 = 0.15 × (l1 + l2) = 0.15 × (7500 + 7500) = 2250 mm
beff1 = (0.2 × 2975 + 0.1 × 2250 ≤ 0.2 × 2250 ≤ 2975 <Fig. 5.2>
= 820 ≤ 450 ≤ 2975
= 450 mm
bw = 2000 mm
beff2 = 450 mm as before
∴ beff = 450 + 2000 + 450 = 2900 mm

Check cracking <7.3.3>

Spacing = 2900 – 2 × (25 – 10 – 25 / 2) / (14 − 1) = 216 mm
σs = (fyk / γs) (As,req / As,prov) (SLS loads/ULS loads) (1 / δ)
= 434.8 × (6770 / 6874) [ (47.8 + 0.3 × 45.8) /
(1.25 × 47.8 + 1.5 × 45.8) × (1 / 0.85)
= 434.8 × 0.98 × 0.48 × 1.18 = 241 MPa
As loading is the cause of cracking satisfy either Table 7.2N or Table 7.3N <7.3.3(2) & Note>
For wk = 0.4 and σs = 240 MPa max. spacing = 250 mm ∴ OK <Table 7.3N>

4.4.7 Flexural design span BC (and CD similar)

Flexure
MEd = 393.2 kNm
K = MEd / bd2fck

where
b = beff = beff1 + bw + beff2 <5.3.2.1, Fig. 5.3>
where
beff1 = (0.2b1 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1
where
b1 referring to Figure 3.9
= (7500 – 1000 – 550) / 2 = 2975 mm
l0 = 0.70 × l2 = 0.7 × 7500 = 5250 mm <Fig. 5.2>
beff1 = (0.2 × 2975 + 0.1 × 5250 ≤ 0.2 × 5250 ≤ 2975
= 1120 ≤ 1050 ≤ 2975
= 1050 mm
bw = 2000 mm
beff2 = (0.2b2 + 0.1l0) ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b2
where
b2 = distance between webs / 2
Referring to Figure 3.9
= (9000 – 1000 – 550) / 2 = 3725 mm
l0 = 5250 mm as before
beff2 = 0.2 × 3725 + 0.1 × 5250 ≤ 0.2 × 5250 ≤ 3725
= 1270 ≤ 1050 ≤ 3725
= 1270 mm
b = 1050 + 2000 + 1270 = 4320 mm

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 27 of 33

 d = 252 mm as before
assuming 10 mm link and H25 in span
fck = 30
K = 393.2 × 106 / (4320 × 2522 × 35)
= 0.041
By inspection, K ≤ K′ ∴ section under-reinforced and no <Appendix A1>
compression reinforcement required
z = (d / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53K)0.5] ≤ 0.95d <Appendix A1>
= (252 / 2) (1 + 0.924) ≤ 0.95 × 252
= 242 > 239 ∴ z = 239 mm
By inspection, x < 1.25 hf design as rectangular section <Appendix A1>
As = MEd / fydz
= 393.2 × 106 / (434.8 × 239) = 3783 mm2
Try 8 no. H25 B (3928 mm2)
Deflection
By inspection, compared to span AB OK
but for the purposes of illustration:
Allowable l / d = N × K × F1 × F2 × F3 <Concise EC2 Sec. 15.7>
where
N = Basic l / d: Check whether to use Exp. (7.16a) or Exp. (7.16b) <7.4.2(2)>
ρ 0 = 0.59% (for fck = 35)
ρ = As / Ac§§§§ = As,req / [bwd + (beff − bw)hf]
where
bw = 2000 mm
ρ = 3783 / (2000 × 252 + (4320 − 2000) × 100)
= 3783 / 736000
= 0.51%
ρ < ρ0 ∴ use Exp. (7.16a)
N = 11 + 1.5 fck0.5 ρ0 / ρ + 3.2fck0.5 (ρ0 / ρ − 1)1.5 <Exp. (7.16a)>
= 11 + 1.5 × 350.5 × 0.059 / 0.051 + 3.2 × 350.5 (0.059 / 0.051 − 1)1.5
= 11 + 10.2 + 23.5
= 44.7
K = (internal span) = 1.5 <Table 7.4N & NA>
F1 = (beff / bw = 4320 / 2000 = 2.16) = 0.88 <7.4.2(2), Concise EC2 10.5.2>
F2 = 7.0 / leff = 7.0 / 7.4 = (span > 7.0 m) = 0.95 <7.4.2(2)>
F3 = 310 / σs
where
σs = (fyk / γs) (As,req / As,prov) (SLS loads / ULS loads) (1 / δ)
= 434.8 × (3783 / 3828) [(47.8 + 0.3 × 45.8) /
(1.25 × 47.8 + 1.5 × 45.8)] × (1 / 0.908)
= 434.8 × 0.99 × 0.48 × 1.10
= 227 MPa
F3 = 310 / σs
= 310 / 227 = 1.37
∴ Permissible l / d = 44.7 × 1.37 × 0.88 × 0.95 × 1.37 = 70.1
Actual l / d = 7500 / 252 = 29.8 ∴ OK
Use 8 no. H25 B (3928 mm2)*****

§§§§
2.18 of PD 6687[5] suggests that r in T sections should be based on the area of concrete above
the centroid of the tension steel.

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 28 of 33

 Hogging
Assuming curtailment of top reinforcement at 0.30l + al, <How to: Detailing
From analysis MEd
at 0.3l from BC (& DC) = 216.9 kNm
at 0.3l from CB (& CD) = 185.6 kNm
K = 216.9 × 106 / (2000 × 2262 × 35) = 0.061
By inspection, K < K′
z = (226/2)[1 + (1 − 3.53 K′)0.5]
= (226/2)[1 + (1 − 3.53 × 0.061)0.5]
= (226/2) (1 + 0.89) < 0.95d
= 214 mm < 215 mm
As = MEd / fydz
= 216.9 × 106 / (434.8 × 214) =2948 mm2
Use 12 no. H20 T (3748 mm2)
(to suit links and bottom steel)

Top steel at supports may be curtailed down to 12 no. H20 T

at 0.3l + al = 0.3 × 7500 + 1.25 × 214 = 2518 say 2600 mm <9.2.1.3(2)>
from centreline of support

4.4.8 Flexural design, support C

At centreline of support
M = 516.0 kNm
At face of support <5.3.2.2(3)>
MEd = 516.0 – 0.2 × 462.6 + 0.202 × 128.5 / 2
= 516.0 – 90.0
= 426.0 kNm
K = MEd / bwd2fck
where
bw = 2000 mm
d = 226 mm as before
K = 426.0 × 106/(2000 × 2262 × 35) = 0.119
By inspection, K < K′
z = (226 / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 K)0.5]
= (226 / 2) [1 + (1 − 3.53 × 0.119)0.5]
= (226 / 2) (1 + 0.76) < 0.95d
= 199 mm
As = MEd / fydz
= 426.0 × 106 / (434.8 × 199) = 4923 mm2
Try 10 no. H25 T (4910 mm2)†††††

4.4.9 Design for beam shear

Support A (and E)
At d from face of support
VEd = 394.6 − (0.400 / 2 + 0∙252) × 128.5 = 336.5 kN <6.2.1(8)>
Maximum shear resistance:

*****
12 no. H20 B (3768 mm2) used to suit final link arrangements.
†††††
12 no. H25 used to suit final arrangement of links.

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 29 of 33

 By inspection, VRd,max OK and cot θ = 2.5
However, for the purpose of illustration: check shear capacity,
VRd,max = αcw bw zνfcd/ (cot θ + tan θ)
where <Exp. (6.9) & NA>
αcw = 1.0
bw = 2000 mm as before
z = 0.9d
<6.2.3(1)>
ν = 0.6 [1 − fck / 250] = 0.516
fcd = 35 / 1.5 = 23.3 MPa
θ = angle of inclination of strut.
By inspection, cot−1 θ << 21.8. But cot θ restricted to
<6.2.3(2) & NA>
2.5 and ∴ tan θ = 0.4.
VRd,max= 1.0 × 2000 × 0.90 × 252 × 0.516 × 23.3 / (2.5 + 0∙4) = 2089.5 kN
∴ OK
Shear links: shear resistance with links
VRd,s = (Asw / s) z fywd cot θ ≥ <Exp. (6.8)>
∴ for VEd ≤ VRd,s
Asw / s ≥ VEd / z fywd cot θ
where
Asw / s = Area of legs of links/link spacing
z = 0.9d as before
fywd = 500 / 1.15 = 434.8
cot θ = 2.5 as before
Asw / s ≥ 336.5 × 103 / (0.9 × 252 × 434.8 × 2.5) = 1.36
Minimum Asw / s = ρw,minbwsin α <9.2.2(5), Exp. (9.4)>
where
ρw,min = 0.08 × fck0.5 / fyk = 0.08 × 350.5 / 500 <Exp. (9.5N) & NA>
= 0.00095
= 2000 mm as before
bw
α = angle between shear reinforcement and the
longitudinal axis. For vertical reinforcement sin
α = 1.0
Minimum Asw / s = 0.00095 × 2000 × 1 = 1.90
But
Maximum spacing of links longitudinally = 0.75d = 183 mm <9.2.2(6)>
Maximum spacing of links laterally = 0.75d ≤ 600 mm = 183 mm <9.2.2(8)>
H10s required to maintain 35 mm cover to H25
∴ Use H10 @ 175 cc both ways
i.e H10 in 12‡‡‡‡‡ legs @ 175 mm cc (Asw / s = 5.38)

Support B (and C and D)

By inspection, the requirement for minimum reinforcement
and, in this instance, for H10 legs of links will outweigh design
requirements. Nonetheless check capacity of Asw / s = 5.38
VRd,s = (Asw / s) z fywd cot θ <Exp. (6.8)>
= 5.38 × 0.9 × 252 × 434.8 × 2.5 = 1326.3 kN
Maximum shear at support = 517.9 kN
i.e. capacity of minimum links not exceeded.

‡‡‡‡‡
(2000 mm – 2 × 25 mm cover − 10 mm diameter) / 175 = 11 spaces, ∴ 12 legs

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 30 of 33

 By inspection, the requirement for indirect support of the ribs <9.2.5, Sec. 3.4.8>
of the slab using 87 mm2 / rib within 150 mm of centreline of
ribs (at 900 mm centres) and within 50 mm of rib/solid
interface is adequately catered for and will not unduly effect
the shear capacity of the beam.
∴ Use H10 in 12 legs @ 175mm cc (Asw / s = 5.38) throughout beam

4.4.10 Check for punching shear, column B

As the beam is wide and shallow it should be checked for punching
shear.
At B, applied shear force, VEd = 569.1 + 517.9 = 1087.0 kN
Check at perimeter of 400 × 400 mm column
vEd = βVEd / uid < vRd,max <6.4.3(2), 6.4.5(3)>
where
β = factor dealing with eccentricity; recommended
value 1.15 <Fig. 6.21N & NA>
VEd = applied shear force
ui = control perimeter under consideration. For <6.4.5(3)>
punching shear adjacent to interior columns u0 =
2(cx + cy) = 1600 mm
d = mean d = (245 + 226) / 2 = 235 mm <Exp. (6.32)>
vEd = 1.15 × 1087.0 × 10 / 1600 × 235 = 3.32 MPa
3

vRd,max = 0.5νfcd <6.4.5(3) Note>

where
ν = 0.6(1 − fck / 250) = 0.516 <Exp. (6.6) & NA>
fcd = αccλfck / γc = 1.0 × 1.0 × 35 / 1.5 = 23.3
vRd,max = 0.5 × 0.516 × 23.3 = 6.02 MPa ∴ OK <Concise EC2 Table 15.7§§§§§>

Check shear stress at basic perimeter u1 (2.0d from face of column) <6.4.2>
vEd = βVEd / u1d < vRdc
where
β, VEd, d as before <Fig. 6.13>
u1 = control perimeter under consideration. For
punching shear at 2d from interior columns
= 2(cx + cy) + 2π × 2d
= 1600 + 2π × 2 × 235 = 4553 mm
vEd = 1.15 × 1087.0 × 103 / 4553 × 235 = 1.17 MPa
vRdc = 0.18 / γc × k × (100 ρlfck)0.333 <Exp. (6.47) & NA>
where
γc = 1.5
k = 1 + (200/d)0.5 ≤ 2
k = 1 +(200 / 235)0.5 = 1.92
ρl = (ρlx ρly)0.5 <6.4.4.1(1)
where
ρlx = areas of bonded steel in a width of the column

§§§§§
In this case, at the perimeter of the column, it is assumed that the strut angle is 45°, i.e. that
cot θ = 1.0. In other cases, where cot θ < 1.0, vRd,max is available from Concise EC2[10] Table 15.7.

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 31 of 33

 plus 3d each side of column.
= 6874 / (2000 × 226) = 0.0152
ρly = 741 / (900 × 245) = 0.0036
ρl = (0.0152 × 0.0036)0.5 = 0.0074
fck = 35
vRdc = 0.18 / 1.5 × 1.92 × (100 × 0.0074 × 35)0.333 = 0.68 MPa <Concise EC2 Table 15.6******>
∴ punching shear reinforcement required
Shear reinforcement (assuming rectangular arrangement of links)
At the basic control perimeter, u1, 2d from the column:
Asw ≥ (vEd – 0.75vRd,c) sr u1 / 1.5fywd,ef) <Exp. (6.52)>
where
sr = 175 mm <9.4.3(1)>
fywd,ef = effective design strength of reinforcement
= (250 + 0.25d) < fyd = 309 MPa <6.4.5(1)>
For perimeter u1
Asw = (1.17 – 0.75 × 0.68) × 175 × 4553 / (1.5 × 309) = 1135 mm2 per perimeter
Try 15 no. H10 (1177 mm2) OK by inspection

Figure 4.21
Shear links and punching shear perimeter u1

Perimeter at which no punching shear links are required:

uout = VEd × β / (d × vRd,c) =
uout = 1087 × 1.15 × 103 / (235 × 0.68) = 7826 mm
Length of column faces = 4 × 400 = 1600 mm
Radius to uout = (7823 – 1600) / 2π = 990 mm
from face of column i.e. in ribs, therefore beam shear governs

******
vRd,c for various values of d and ρl is available from Concise EC2[10] Table 15.6

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 32 of 33

4.4.11 Summary of design

Figure 4.22
Summary of design

Figure 4.23
Section X–X

WE 4 Beams v7c 17 Sep 07.doc 17-Sep-07 Page 33 of 33

Symbols and abbreviations used in this publication
Symbol Definition Symbol Definition
IxI Absolute value of x Asw Area of punching shear
1/r Curvature at a particular reinforcement in one
section perimeter around the column
A Cross-sectional area; Asw,min Minimum cross-sectional area
Accidental action of shear reinforcement
A Site altitude, m (snow) Asw,min Minimum area of punching
A Altitude of the site in metres shear reinforcement in one
above mean sea level (wind) perimeter around the column
A, B, C Variables used in the a Distance, allowance at
determination of λlim supports
Ac Cross-sectional area of a Axis distance from the
concrete concrete surface to the centre
Act Area of concrete in that part of the bar (fire)
of the section that is a An exponent (in considering
calculated to be in tension biaxial bending of columns)
just before the formation of a Projection of the footing from
the first crack the face of the column or wall
Ad Design value of an accidental ab Half the centre-to-centre
action spacing of bars (perpendicular
AEd Design value of a seismic to the plane of the bend)
action al Distance by which the location
Ak Area enclosed by the centre where a bar is no longer
lines of connecting walls required for bending moment
including the inner hollow is displaced to allow for the
area (torsion) forces from the truss model
Ap Area of prestressing steel for shear. (‘Shift’ distance for
Aref Reference area of the curtailment)
structure or structural am Average axis distance (fire)
element (wind) asd Axis distance (in fire) from the
As Cross-sectional area of lateral surface of a member to
reinforcement the centre of the bar
As,min Minimum cross-sectional area av Distance between bearings or
of reinforcement face of support and face of
As,prov Area of steel provided load
As,req Area of steel required a1, b1 Dimensions of the control
As1 Area of reinforcing steel in perimeter around an
layer 1 elongated support (punching
As2 Area of compression steel (in shear)
layer 2) b Overall width of a cross-
Asl Area of the tensile section, or flange width in a T
reinforcement extending at or L beam
least lbd + d beyond the b Breadth of building (wind)
section considered be Effective width of a flat slab
AsM (AsN) Total area of reinforcement (adjacent to perimeter
required in symmetrical, column)
rectangular columns to resist beff Effective width of a flange
moment (axial load) using beq (heq) Equivalent width (height) of
simplified calculation method column = b (h) for rectangular
Ast Cross-sectional area of sections
transverse steel (at laps) bmin Minimum width of web on T, I
Asw Cross-sectional area of shear or L beams
reinforcement

WE 0 Contents v7 13 Sep 07 for web .doc 17-Sep-07 Page 2 of

8
Symbol Definition Symbol Definition
bt Mean width of the tension Ec, Ec(28) Tangent modulus of elasticity
zone. For a T beam with the of normal weight concrete at a
flange in compression, only stress of σc = 0 and at 28 days
the width of the web is taken Ec,eff Effective modulus of elasticity
into account of concrete
bw Width of the web on T, I or L Ecd Design value of modulus of
beams. Minimum width elasticity of concrete
between tension and Ecm Secant modulus of elasticity of
compression chords concrete
by, bz Dimensions of the control Ed Design value of the effect of
perimeter (punching shear) actions
Ce Exposure coefficient (snow) EI Bending stiffness
Ct Thermal coefficient (snow) Es Design value of modulus of
c1, c2 Dimensions of a rectangular elasticity of reinforcing steel
column. For edge columns, c1 Exp. Expression
is measured perpendicular to EQU Static equilibrium
the free edge (punching shear) e Eccentricity
calt Altitude factor (wind) e2 Deflection (used in assessing
cd Dynamic factor (wind) M2 in slender columns)
cdir Directional factor (wind) ei Eccentricity due to
ce,flat Exposure factor (wind) imperfections
cf Force coefficient (wind) epar Eccentricity parallel to the
cmin Minimum cover, (due to the slab edge resulting from a
requirements for bond, cmin,b moment about an axis
or durability cmin,dur) perpendicular to the slab edge
cnom Nominal cover. Nominal cover (punching shear)
should satisfy the minimum ey, ez Eccentricity, MEd/VEd along y
requirements of bond, and z axes respectively
durability and fire (punching shear)
cpe (External) pressure coefficient F1 Factor to account for flanged
(wind) sections (deflection)
cpe,10 (External) pressure coefficient F2 Factor to account for brittle
for areas > 1 m2 (wind) partitions in association with
cpi Internal pressure coefficient long spans (deflection)
(wind) F3 Factor to account for service
cprob Probability factor (wind) stress in tensile reinforcement
cseason Season factor (wind) (deflection)
cscd Structural factor (wind) F Action
cs Size factor (wind) Fbt Tensile force in the bar at the
cy, cx Column dimensions in plan start of the bend caused by
D Diameter of a circular column; ultimate loads
Diameter Fc (Fs) Force in concrete (steel)
d Effective depth to tension Fcd Design value of the concrete
steel compression force in the
d2 Effective depth to direction of the longitudinal
compression steel member axis
dc Effective depth of concrete in Fd Design value of an action
compression FE Tensile force in reinforcement
deff Effective depth of the slab to be anchored
taken as the average of the FEd Compressive force, design
effective depths in two value of support reaction
orthogonal directions Fk Characteristic value of an
(punching shear) action
dl A short length of a perimeter Frep Representative action (= ψFk
(punching shear) where ψ = factor to convert
E Effect of action; Integrity (in characteristic to
fire); Elastic modulus representative action)

WE 0 Contents v7 13 Sep 07 for web .doc 17-Sep-07 Page 3 of

8
Symbol Definition Symbol Definition
FRs Resisting tensile force in steel fyk Characteristic yield strength
Fs Tensile force in the bar of reinforcement
Ftd Design value of the tensile fywd Design yield strength of the
force in longitudinal shear reinforcement
reinforcement fywd,ef Effective design strength of
Ftie,col Horizontal tie force, column to punching shear reinforcement
floor or roof (kN) fywk Characteristic yield strength
Ftie,fac Horizontal tie force, wall to of shear reinforcement
floor or roof (kN/m) Gk Characteristic value of a
Ftie,int Internal tie tensile force permanent action
Ftie,per Peripheral tie tensile force Gk,sup Upper characteristic value of a
Fwd Design shear strength of weld, permanent action
design value of the force in Gk,inf Lower characteristic value of a
stirrups in corbels permanent action
fbd Ultimate bond stress gk Characteristic value of a
fc Compressive strength of permanent action per unit
concrete length or area
fcd Design value of concrete Hi Horizontal action applied at a
compressive strength level
fcd,pl Design compressive strength of H Height of building (wind)
plain concrete h Overall depth of a cross-
fck Characteristic compressive section; Height
cylinder strength of concrete have Obstruction height (wind)
at 28 days hdis Displacement height (wind)
fck, cube Characteristic compressive hf Depth of footing; Thickness of
cube strength of concrete at flange
28 days hH Vertical height of a drop or
fcm Mean value of concrete column head below soffit of a
cylinder compressive strength slab (punching shear)
fct,d Design tensile strength of h0 Notional size of cross-section
concrete (αctfct,k/γc) hs Depth of slab
fct,eff Mean tensile strength of I Second moment of area of
concrete effective at the time concrete section
cracks may be first expected I Insulation (in fire)
to occur. i Radius of gyration
fct,eff = fctm at the appropriate K MEd/bd2fck. A measure of the
age relative compressive stress in
fct,k Characteristic axial tensile a member in flexure
strength of concrete K Factor to account for
fctm Mean value of axial tensile structural system (deflection)
strength of concrete K′ Value of K above which
fct,0.05 5% fractile value of axial compression reinforcement is
tensile strength of concrete required
fct,0.95 95% fractile value of axial Kr Correction factor for curvature
tensile strength of concrete depending on axial load
fcvd Concrete design strength in Kϕ Factor for taking account of
shear and compression (plain creep
concrete) k Coefficient or factor
fsc Compressive stress in kc Coefficient allowing for the
compression reinforcement at nature of the stress
ULS distribution within the section
ft Tensile strength of immediately prior to cracking
reinforcement and for the change of the
ft,k Characteristic tensile strength lever arm as a result of
of reinforcement cracking (minimum areas)
fyd Design yield strength of l Clear height of column
longitudinal reinforcement, Asl between end restraints

WE 0 Contents v7 13 Sep 07 for web .doc 17-Sep-07 Page 4 of

8
Symbol Definition Symbol Definition
l Height of the structure in N0Ed,fi Axial load under fire
metres conditions
l (or L) Length; Span NA National Annex
l0 Effective length (of columns) Na, Nb Longitudinal forces
l0 Distance between points of contributing to Hi
zero moment NEd Design value of the applied
l0 Design lap length axial force (tension or
l0,fi Effective length under fire compression) at ULS
conditions NDP Nationally Determined
lb Basic anchorage length Parameter(s) as published in a
lbd Design anchorage length country’s National Annex
lb,eq Equivalent anchorage length n Load level at normal
lb,min Minimum anchorage length temperatures. Conservatively
lb,rqd Basic anchorage length n = 0.7 (fire)
leff Effective span n Axial stress at ULS
lH Horizontal distance from n Ultimate action (load) per unit
column face to edge of a drop length (or area)
or column head below soffit of n0 Number of storeys
a slab (punching shear) nb Number of bars in the bundle
ln Clear distance between the Qk Characteristic value of a
faces of supports variable action
ls Floor to ceiling height Qk1 (Qki) Characteristic value of a
lx, ly Spans of a two-way slab in the leading variable action
x and y directions (Characteristic value of an
M Bending moment. Moment accompanying variable action)
from first order analysis qk Characteristic value of a
M′ Moment capacity of a singly variable action per unit length
reinforced section (above or area
which compression qb Basic wind pressure
reinforcement is required) qp Peak wind pressure
M0,Eqp First order bending moment in qp(ze) Peak velocity pressure at
quasi permanent load reference height ze, (wind)
combination (SLS) R Resistance; Mechanical
M01, M02 First order end moments at resistance (in fire)
ULS including allowances for R/A′ Vertical bearing resistance per
imperfections unit area (foundations)
M0Ed Equivalent first order moment RA Reaction at support A
including the effect of RB Reaction at support B
imperfections (at about mid Rd Design value of the resistance
height) to an action
M0Ed,fi First order moment under fire RH Relative humidity
conditions r Radius
M2 Nominal second order moment rcont The distance from the
in slender columns centroid of a column to the
Med Design value of the applied control section outside the
internal bending moment column head
MEdy, MEdz Design moment in the rm Ratio of first order end
respective direction moments in columns at ULS
MRdy, MRdz Moment resistance in the S, N, R Cement types
respective direction SLS Serviceability limit state(s) –
m Number of vertical members corresponding to conditions
contributing to an effect beyond which specified service
m Mass requirements are no longer
N Axial force met
N Basic span-to-effective-depth s Spacing
ratio, l/d, for K = 1.0 s Snow load on a roof

WE 0 Contents v7 13 Sep 07 for web .doc 17-Sep-07 Page 5 of

8
Symbol Definition Symbol Definition
sk Characteristic ground snow VRd,max Shear resistance of a member
load limited by the crushing of
sr Radial spacing of perimeters compression struts
of shear reinforcement
st Tangential spacing shear VRd,cmin Minimum shear resistance of
reinforcement along member considering concrete
perimeters of shear alone
reinforcement VRd,s Shear resistance of a member
T Torsional moment governed by the yielding of
Ted Design value of the applied shear reinforcement
torsional moment vb Basic wind velocity
TRd Design torsional resistance vb,0 The fundamental basic wind
moment velocity being the
TRd,max Maximum design torsional characteristic 10 minute wind
resistance moment capacity velocity at 10 m above ground
t Thickness; Time being level in open country
considered; Breadth of support vb,map Fundamental basic wind
t0 The age of concrete at the velocity from Figure NA.1 m/s
time of loading vEd Punching shear stress
tef,i Effective wall thickness vEd Shear stress for sections
(torsion) without shear reinforcement
ULS Ultimate limit state(s) – (= VEd/bwd)
associated with collapse or vEd,z Shear stress for sections with
other forms of structural shear reinforcement (=
failure VEd/bwz = VEd/bw0.9d)
u Perimeter of concrete cross- vRd,c Design shear resistance of
section, having area Ac concrete without shear
u Perimeter of that part which is reinforcement expressed as a
exposed to drying stress
u Circumference of outer edge vRd,cs Design punching shear
of effective cross-section resistance of concrete with
(torsion) shear reinforcement expressed
u0 Perimeter adjacent to columns as a stress (punching shear)
(punching shear) vRd,max Capacity of concrete struts
u1 Basic control perimeter (at 2d expressed as a stress
from face of load) (punching W1 Factor corresponding to a
shear) distribution of shear (punching
u1* Reduced control perimeter at shear)
perimeter columns (at 2d from We Peak external wind load
face of load (punching shear) Wk Characteristic value of wind
ui Length of the control action (NB not in the
perimeter under consideration Eurocodes and should be
(punching shear) regarded as a form of Qk,
uk Perimeter of the area Ak characteristic value of a
(torsion) variable action)
uout Perimeter at which shear wk Crack width
reinforcement is no longer wmax Limiting calculated crack
required width
V Shear force X0, XA, XC, Concrete exposure classes
VEd Design value of the applied XD, XF, XS
shear force x Neutral axis depth
VEd,red Applied shear force reduced x Distance between buildings
by the force due to soil (wind)
pressure less self weight of x Distance of the section being
base (punching shear, considered from the centre
foundations) line of the support
VRd,c Shear resistance of a member x, y, z Co-ordinates; Planes under
without shear reinforcement consideration

WE 0 Contents v7 13 Sep 07 for web .doc 17-Sep-07 Page 6 of

8
Symbol Definition Symbol Definition
xu Depth of the neutral axis at δ Ratio of the redistributed
the ultimate limit state after moment to the elastic bending
redistribution moment. Redistribution ratio
Z Zone number obtained (1 – % redistribution)
from map (snow) Δc Allowance for deviation made
z Lever arm of internal forces in design, e.g. to allow for
z Reference height (wind) workmanship (BS EN 13760)
ze Reference height for windward Δcdev Allowance made in design for
walls of rectangular buildings deviation
(wind) Δεp Change in strain in
α Angle; Angle of shear links to prestressing steel
the longitudinal axis; Ratio ΔFtd Additional tensile force in
αA A coefficient for use with a longitudinal reinforcement
representative variable action due to the truss shear model
taking into account area εc Compressive strain in concrete
supported εc2 Compressive strain limit in
α1, α2, α3, Factors dealing with concrete for concrete in pure
α4, α5, α6 anchorage and laps of bars axial compression or strain in
αcc (αct) A coefficient taking into concrete at reaching maximum
account long term effects of strength assuming use of the
compressive (tensile) load and parabolic–rectangular stress–
the way load is applied strain relationship
αn A coefficient for use with a εc3 Compressive strain limit in
representative variable action concrete for concrete in pure
taking into account number of axial compression or strain in
storeys supported concrete at reaching maximum
β Angle; Ratio; Coefficient strength assuming use of the
β Factor dealing with bilinear stress–strain
eccentricity (punching shear) relationship
γ Partial factor εcu Ultimate compressive strain in
γA Partial factor for accidental the concrete
actions, A εcu2 Ultimate compressive strain
γG Partial factor for permanent limit in concrete which is not
actions, G fully in pure axial compression
γGk,sup Partial factor to be applie3d assuming use of the parabolic–
to Gk,inf rectangular stress–strain
relationship (numerically
γGk,inf Partial factor to be applied to
Gk,sup εcu2 = εcu3)
εcu3 Ultimate compressive strain
γM Partial factor for a material
limit in concrete which is not
property, taking account of
fully in pure axial compression
uncertainties in the material
assuming use of the bilinear
property itself, in geometric
stress–strain relationship
deviation and in the design
model used εp(0) Initial strain in prestressing
γQ Partial factor for variable steel
actions, Q εs Strain in reinforcing steel
γC Partial factor for concrete εu Strain of reinforcement or
prestressing steel at maximum
γF Partial factor for actions, F
load
γf Partial factor for actions
εud Design limit for strain for
without taking account of
reinforcing steel in tension
model uncertainties
= 0.9 εuk
γg Partial factor for permanent
εuk Characteristic strain of
actions without taking account
reinforcement (or prestressing
of model uncertainties
steel) at maximum load
γS Partial factor for reinforcing
εy Reinforcement yield strain
steel
η Factor defining effective
strength (= 1 for ≤ C50/60)

WE 0 Contents v7 13 Sep 07 for web .doc 17-Sep-07 Page 7 of

8
Symbol Definition Symbol Definition
η1 Coefficient for bond conditions ϕef Effective creep factor
η2 Coefficient for bar diameter ϕ(t,t0) Creep coefficient, defining
θ Angle; Angle of compression creep between times t and t0,
struts (shear) related to elastic deformation
θI Inclination used to represent at 28 days
imperfections φ Bar diameter
λ Slenderness ratio φn Equivalent diameter of a
λ Factor defining the height of bundle of reinforcing bars
the compression zone (= 0.8 φm Mandrel diameter
for ≤ C50/60) ψ Factors defining
λfi Slenderness in fire representative values of
λlim Limiting slenderness ratio (of variable actions
columns) ψ0 Combination value of a
μI Snow load shape factor variable action (e.g. used
μfi Ratio of the design axial load when considering ULS)
under fire conditions to the ψ1 Frequent value of a variable
design resistance of the action (e.g. used when
column at normal temperature considering whether section
but with an eccentricity will have cracked or not)
applicable to fire conditions ψ2 Quasi-permanent value of a
ν Strength reduction factor for variable action (e.g. used
concrete cracked in shear when considering
ξ Reduction factor/distribution deformation)
coefficient. Factor applied to ω Mechanical reinforcement
Gk in BS EN 1990 Exp. (6.10b) ratio = As fyd/Ac fcd ≤ 1
ρ Required tension
reinforcement ratio
ρ Density of air (wind)
ρ′ Reinforcement ratio for
required compression
reinforcement, As2/bd
ρ1 Percentage of reinforcement
lapped within 0.65l0 from the
centre line of the lap being
considered
ρl Reinforcement ratio for
longitudinal reinforcement
ρ0 Reference reinforcement ratio
fck0.5 × 10–3
σgd Design value of the ground
pressure
σs Stress in reinforcement at SLS
σs Absolute value of the
maximum stress permitted in
the reinforcement
immediately after the
formation of the crack
σsc(σst) Stress in compression (and
tension) reinforcement
σsd Design stress in the bar at the
ultimate limit state
σsu Estimate of stress in
reinforcement at SLS
(deflection)
τ Torsional shear stress
ϕ(∞,t0) Final value of creep
coefficient

WE 0 Contents v7 13 Sep 07 for web .doc 17-Sep-07 Page 8 of

8